Quarterlytics / Advertising Agencies / Next Fifteen Communications Group plc / FY2021 Annual Report

Next Fifteen Communications Group plc
Annual Report 2021

NFC · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker NFC
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Advertising Agencies
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · Next Fifteen Communications Group plc
Loading PDF…
N

e

x

t

F

i

f

t

e

e

n

C

o

m

m

u

n

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

s

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

2

1

The year 
everything 
turned

UPSIDE
O 
W 
NNext Fifteen Communications Group plc 

Annual Report 2021

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Introduction

2020 wasn’t your average year. Everyone’s life changed in some way and so it’s no surprise that almost all businesses 
changed as well. If your business wasn’t that digital before the pandemic it either is now, or there’s a good chance your 
business doesn’t exist anymore. So, the digital economy has become the economy and businesses, like Next 15, that are 
digitally native have thrived despite all the challenges Covid-19 has thrown at it.

At its core, Next 15 is a group of businesses designed to help companies grow. We do that in four different ways. First, we 
use data to generate the insights that help businesses understand the opportunities and challenges they face and arm them 
with the knowledge they need to make the best decisions. Second, we help our customers optimise their brand reputation 
and build the mission-critical digital assets businesses need to engage with their audiences. Third, we use creativity, data, 
and analytics to create the connections with customers to drive sales and other forms of customer interaction. Last, we help 
customers redesign their business model or create new ventures to maximise the value of their organisation.

So, you shouldn’t think of us as marketing consultants, you should think of us as growth consultants. And not surprisingly, 
we think that’s a big growth opportunity.

Strategic reportFinancial highlights

Contents

.

m
9
6
6
2
£

.

m
5
8
4
2
£

m

1
.
4
2
2
£

p
6
5
7

.

p
0
7

.

Net revenue 

£266.9m 

p
5
2

.

Dividend  
per share

7p 

.

m
5
4
6
£

.

m
5
3
4
£

m

1
.
2
3
£

9
1

0
2

1
2

+7%

9
1

0
2

1
2

+180%

9
1

0
2

1
2

Net cash from 
operating activities

£64.5m 

+48%

.

p
7
0
4

p
8
4
3

.

p
1
.
3
3

Adjusted diluted 
earnings per share

40.7p 

+17%

9
1

0
2

1
2

m

1
.
9
4
£

.

m
2
0
4
£

.

m
0
6
3
£

9
1

0
2

1
2

Adjusted profit 
before tax

£49.1m 

+22%

.

m
7
0
2
£

.

m
4
9
1
£

.

m
7
3
1
£

9
1

0
2

1
2

Statutory 
operating profit

£13.7m 

-29%

Adjusted measures are reconciled to the statutory results 
in notes 2, 5, 10 and 19 to the financial statements.

Financial highlights
About us
Chair's statement
Chief Executive’s statement
Strategy
How we create value

Strategic report
1 
2 
4 
6 
8 
9 
10  Financial review
16  How we manage our risks
17  Principal risks and uncertainties
21  Section 172(1) statement

 Board of Directors and Company Secretary

Governance
24 
26  Corporate governance statement
36  Audit Committee report
40  Directors’ remuneration report
58  Report of the Directors
61  Directors’ responsibilities statement

 Consolidated statement of changes in equity

Financial statements
62 
Independent auditors’ report
76  Consolidated income statement
78  Consolidated balance sheet
80 
82  Consolidated statement of cash flow
84  Notes to the accounts
136  Company balance sheet
138  Company statement of changes in equity
139   Notes forming part of the Company 

financial statements

147  Five-year financial information

Other information
149  Shareholder information
150  Advisers

1

Strategic reportAbout us

We are growth consultants. As such we are 
obsessed with finding ways to help our 
customers grow their top line, bottom line, 
reputation, online following, market share, 
customer  satisfaction  and  share  price. 
Everything we do is driven by data and 
embraces technology. We hire the brightest 
minds to work with the world’s best businesses 
that share our desire to be a great company. 
To us being great is about a team of diverse 
talent creating products and services that 
the world needs and doing it in way that is 
responsible and equitable. We’d like the 
world to still be here for a while.

Our business
The world of consulting has been forever 
changed by data and technology. These 
assets are now the core of almost all businesses 
and how they are used can make or break 
a company’s future. So, a company’s growth 
is no longer just about good product design 
and customer service with a layer of good 
marketing. Today it’s about using data to 
predict a customer’s needs and wants, it’s 
about using technology to craft the best 
way to engage with your customer and very 
often embedding technology in your product 
or service. As a result, companies across 
the world are looking for partners that can 
help them as they navigate the path to being 
a digital and data driven business. This is 
where Next 15 comes in.

Our brands and sectors 
We have focused our business on the biggest 
challenges and opportunities our customers 
face when they look at how to grow. We 
essentially have four different businesses: 

A customer insight business that uses data 
to help clients see the opportunities that 
face them and predict their customer behaviour. 

Business transformation capability that is 
designed to help our customers solve any 
problem that is holding back their ability to 
become better understood by their audiences. 
This may mean working to optimise their 
brand reputation, but it may also be helping 
them to create entirely novel businesses 
that reach new audiences. 

A customer engagement digital asset design 
and building business that is creating the 
ecommerce platforms, apps, and websites 
that are the window through which the vast 
majority of most of the world’s commerce 
is now transacted. Designing a customer’s 
digital experience is now crucial to many 
companies’ success. 

A customer delivery business. This is last 
link in the chain and is increasingly a digital 
link. Businesses want to anticipate what 
their customers want, when they will want 
it and so on. It is perhaps not surprising that 
this is a high growth area for our group.

Next 15 remains ambitious and is committed 
to expanding the international presence of 
its existing business and will continue to 
invest in their growth and the creation of 
new products and services. We will also 
look to acquire businesses that strengthen 
our capabilities in the areas outlined earlier. 

Our customers
We work with many of the world's most 
important companies. This includes Google, 
Facebook, Amazon, Microsoft, Procter & 
Gamble, American Express, Salesforce, Pepsi, 
Genentech and the World Health Organization. 
The significance of the role we play for them 
is reflected in the fact that many of these 
relationships are over a decade long. 

2

Strategic reportEmployees
2,077
2020: 2,183
2019: 1,979

Offices
47
2020: 49
2019: 50

Countries
15
2020: 15
2019: 14

More about our business
next15.com/about-us

More about our brands
next15.com/portfolio

3

Strategic reportChair’s statement

“ In a year like no other, these are excellent results.”

Dear Shareholders,

2020 wasn’t a year, it was an era unto itself. It was a time when 
businesses were tested, retested and then tested again. As the 
incoming Chair, I’m proud to say that Next 15 passed these 
tests with flying colours. The net revenues in the year to 
31 January 2021 were up 7.4% to £266.9m (2020: £248.5m) 
and adjusted profit before tax was an impressive 22% higher 
at £49.1m. On a statutory basis, the group incurred a loss before 
tax of £1.3m (2020: profit of £5.6m) with an impairment of 
property driving the year-on-year change. Fully diluted adjusted 
earnings per share showed growth of 17% to 40.7p and net 
debt became net cash of £14m. In a year like no other, these 
are excellent results, especially given it was a year when the 
Group’s businesses went to great lengths to protect its employees' 
personal safety and wellbeing. 

During the year, the Group revisited its strategy to ensure we 
can deliver on our growth ambitions. In the past we thought 
about the products and services we sold, such as data, social 
media content and digital marketing. As we roll out the strategy 
in the new financial year, our approach is around the problems 
we solve for customers. Importantly though, we are also focusing 
the Group’s operations around how we help our customers 
grow. During the pandemic we saw all of our customers wrestle 
with how to succeed. Some of our technology customers were 
challenged by how best to help their customers as they had 
to adapt their business models. Many of our customers, technology 
or otherwise, wrestled with how to innovate so that they could 
emerge from the pandemic as a better brand, a better employer, 
and a better business. All of these are growth challenges. As 
Tim notes in his statement, we looked hard at where we believed 
we could help our customers most, which, going forwards, will 

see us focus on four segments: customer insight, customer 
engagement, customer delivery and business transformation. 
This new approach will not only focus our internal investment 
but our future acquisition strategy. 

Looking to the year ahead, the Board is optimistic about the 
prospects for the Group, despite the continued impact of 
Covid-19 on the economy. Covid-19 tested our business model, 
but it also tested the character of the team that leads Next 15 
and the people that work for the Group across the world. As 
the first effects of the pandemic took hold at the start of the 
financial year, Tim said that he wanted Next 15 to come out of 
this year as a stronger business. He and the executive team 
have worked tirelessly in order to achieve that outcome. They 
have changed the way we operate, rethinking the offering to 
customers, how the businesses in the group interact and how 
we interact with our people. Most importantly, the past year 
has shown that our people have the character to handle 
challenges that are thrown at them. This resilience and character 
displayed by our people doesn’t appear on our balance sheet, 
but it has proven to be an invaluable asset. I would like to thank 
all the people in the Group for their efforts during the year to 
deliver these results. 

Next 15 is a people-based business and during the course of 
the year we have accelerated our commitment to running a 
more sustainable, equitable and diverse organisation that 
displays leadership in governance and values. I was therefore 
proud of the Group’s decision to repay the £1.4m of furlough 
scheme support it had received from the UK Government when 
Covid impacted the world economy last March to September. 
As we emerge from the pandemic, we will continue to step up 
our efforts to ensure that Next 15 is a truly inclusive environment, 

reflecting the communities in which it operates and gives back 
to the environment as much as it takes out. With this in mind 
we are helping our various businesses to embrace the B Corp 
certification process. This is not a minor undertaking and will 
take time to complete but it will ensure they adopt a progressive 
framework that embraces DE&I and planetary goals.

Turning back to this year's results, the Board recognises the 
importance of the dividend to our shareholders. The decision 
taken by the Board during 2020 to suspend both the final 
dividend payment for the year ended 31 January 2020 and 
the interim dividend for the 2021 half year, was made at a time 
of considerable global uncertainty and to provide cash flow 
headroom. We are therefore pleased to be in a position to 
reinstate the dividend. This follows the strong trading, particularly 
during the second half of the financial year and results in a 
recommendation of a dividend of 7p per share which is in line 
with our dividend policy before the pandemic.

I want to close by thanking my predecessor, Richard Eyre, for 
all that he has done for Next 15 over the last decade. While he 
no longer serves on the board, I’m thrilled that he will continue 
to consult to the Group and share his wisdom. I am taking over 
the role at a hugely exciting time for the Group. The ambitions 
and plans the executive team has for the Group should see it 
continue to expand in interesting an innovative ways. 

Penny Ladkin-Brand
Chair
12 April 2021

4

Strategic reportPenny Ladkin-Brand 
Chair

Tim Dyson

Peter Harris

Helen Hunter

Robyn Perriss

Mark Sanford

5

Strategic reportChief Executive’s statement

“ We have refocused the Group 
so that it is set up to achieve 
the biggest challenge facing 
all of our customers: growth.”

Dear Shareholders,

“It was the best of times, it was the worst of times, it was the 
age of wisdom, it was the age of foolishness, it was the epoch 
of belief, it was the epoch of incredulity, it was the season of 
light, it was the season of darkness, it was the spring of hope, 
it was the winter of despair.” These famous opening lines to 
Charles Dickens' 'A Tale of Two Cities' seem so very apt for the 
year we have just had. From the perspective of humanity, the 
destruction caused by the pandemic has been horrible to 
witness. So, to have prospered as a business leaves one, at 
times, feeling a little guilty, but prosper we did. Indeed, without 
appreciating it, we had been building a business that was ready 
for Covid-19 and the changes this would force on our customers 
and their businesses. 

Being in the right place at the right time wasn’t simply luck, but 
luck has played a part in our success. For example, we were 
fortunate not to have significant exposure to the travel and 
leisure industry. We were also fortunate that we didn’t have a 
large live events business. However, it wasn’t luck that we 
managed our businesses well when Covid-19 impacted the 
world’s major economies, and it wasn’t luck that we had the 
digital and tech services, support and expertise that our customers 
needed to cope during trying times. This is because we have 
worked hard over the last five years to make our businesses 
as modern as they could be.

A lot has been written about ‘the new normal’ being created 
by Covid-19. In reality, this new world is in so many ways a 
logical evolution of the old one, it’s just that this evolution has 

For this year, Tim Dyson has 
recorded a review of the 
year using Google Meet.

To watch and listen to the 
recording, scan the QR 
code or go to 
next15.com/2021/04/29/
Tim-Dyson-Next-Fifteen-
Communications-Group-
plc-annual-report

Tim Dyson
CEO

Penny Ladkin-Brand

Peter Harris

Helen Hunter

Robyn Perriss

Mark Sanford

6

Strategic reporthappened at lightning pace. The shift by brands to a more 
direct relationship with their consumers has been underway 
for years, fuelled by ecommerce and social media, the two 
basic platforms needed to make the business model work. 
However, shifts of this nature are complex moves for large 
companies. In Covid-times their entire business model, including 
their supply chains, have had to be changed in months. Some 
businesses have struggled to make the necessary shifts, but 
many have taken the challenges in their stride. This has thrust 
innovation onto the agenda of business leaders throughout 
the world. But innovation isn’t just a task, it’s a way of being 
and as such has changed the way companies are designed 
and behave. As businesses have changed, the need for strategic 
partners who can move at speed has never been clearer. 
Enter Next 15.

While our customers have been changing, so have we. For 
example, going forward we have refocused the Group for the 
next financial year so that it is set up to solve the biggest 
challenge facing all of our customers: growth. There are lots 
of ways we could help our customers grow, but we believe we 
have a unique advantage in four areas: 

•  Customer Insight

•  Customer Engagement

•  Customer Delivery

•  Business Transformation

Our customer insights business is set up to help customers 
understand the situations they face and arm them with the 
knowledge they need to make the best decisions. Our customer 
engagement business is designed to help our customers 
optimise their brand reputation, build the mission-digital assets 
such as ecommerce platforms, apps and websites that are the 
window through which much of the world’s commerce is now 
transacted. Customer delivery businesses are deeply specialised 
to use creativity, data and analytics to create the connections 
with customers to drive sales and other forms of interaction. 

This link in the chain is increasingly digital. Businesses want to 
anticipate what their customers want and when they will want 
it. It is perhaps not surprising that this is a high growth area for 
our group. The last area is business transformation. This is 
where customers need our help to either redesign their business 
model or create entirely new ventures. It is also the area where 
they need our help to understand how to maximise the value 
of the organisation. 

The resilient performance of the Group in the last year has put 
the business in a great position to capitalise on the significant 
growth opportunities we see in the year ahead, if we continue 
to execute well. Whilst we do expect our operating costs to 
increase a small amount as people return to a more normal 
way of working, we expect to be able to deliver good organic 
growth which should contribute to progression at the top and 
bottom line.

As we focus on our future it is good to see that the investments 
the Group has made in recent years to modernise its business 
model are delivering strong returns. The growth in the last year 
seen in businesses such as Agent3 and Activate, and the 
contribution being made by new additions such as Mach49 
should give shareholders a great deal of comfort in both the 
strategy being pursued and the ability to execute on that strategy.

The other big change for our business during the pandemic 
has been an acceleration of our commitment to being values 
driven. We have long believed that our corporate culture was 
a vital asset. What Covid-19 and the Black Lives Matter movement 
brought into focus was the importance to our people, and our 
customers, of living our values and actively committing to 
continual improvement. We have also heard from a number of 
shareholders that they want to us show a clearer commitment 
to being leaders on Environmental, Social and Corporate 
Governance (ESG) issues. I should stress that our commitments 
in this area are and will continue to be significant. We are 
establishing climate impact goals and are working towards 
carbon neutrality. We have committed to specific goals regarding 
diversity, equity and inclusion. We are also committed to 
progressive governance that enables shareholders to have 
greater transparency and therefore confidence in the decisions 
we make about the running of our business. This is why we 
decided earlier this year to repay the £1.4m we had received 
from the UK government to furlough staff at the height of the 
crisis. It was clear to us that the furlough scheme was designed 
for companies that were struggling to survive, not ones like 
ours that were thriving. We felt that repaying this money was 
the right thing to do.

Current trading and outlook
Whilst Covid-19 continues to impact the global economy, we 
remain optimistic about trading two months into our new financial 
year. The strength of our customer base, coupled with the 
increasingly digital and data-driven nature of our product offering, 
continue to position us well to capitalise on opportunities as 
the economy continues to adapt to and ultimately emerge from 
the pandemic. Unsurprisingly therefore, new business activity 
has remained strong and we have expanded briefs from a 
number of clients including Salesforce, IBM and Amazon. We 
have every confidence in a bright future for Next 15 and in 
creating further value for our shareholders and the Board 
remains confident of achieving management's expectations. 
The resumption of the payment of dividends following our 
AGM in June 2021 is a sign of our confidence in the future 
performance of the Group.

I don’t know any business leader that would like to re-live the 
last year, but I’m proud to say that the pandemic brought out 
the best in the people that work at Next 15. I’m acutely aware 
of how hard the teams have worked in these challenging 
circumstances, but I couldn’t be prouder of where that work 
has taken us. Next 15 was a great business before the pandemic. 
It is now an even better business and for that I thank our teams 
from the bottom of my heart.

Tim Dyson 
Chief Executive Officer
12 April 2021

7

Strategic reportOur business model

Our strategy

Our mission is to become the world’s leading 
growth consultancy. For Next 15, growth consulting 
isn’t just about growth in sales and profitability. 
It is growth in reputation, talent and product 
market share. It’s growth in valuation, innovation 
and talent retention. Growth is a complex problem, 
and it needs a sophisticated solution.

digital processes. They are also no longer completely 
discrete. A problem or opportunity in one area 
is now connected to everything else. The ability 
of consultants to view businesses through this 
digital lens is crucial. But the overriding challenge 
facing every aspect of consulting is how we enable 
growth (in every sense of the word).

1
To build a portfolio of businesses who are 
best-in-class experts in every aspect of 
growth, and who can work collectively to 
solve the most challenging problems for 
the world’s biggest companies.

Businesses are increasingly one large digital 
entity. Supply chains, manufacturing, service 
delivery,  product  development,  customer 
engagement and support - these are increasingly 

Business requires partners that can knit together 
insight, creative, business design, digital build 
and customer engagement under one roof. That 
is what Next 15 is building.

Customer 
Insight

Customer 
Engagement 

Next 15 offers one, or 
a combination, of these 
business services to some 
of the most innovative and 
exciting companies  
in the world.

Customer 
Delivery

Business 
Transformation

2
To use our growth expertise internally to 
create an environment in which highly 
talented teams can deliver their best work. 
An environment that attracts ambitious 
entrepreneurs to have their ambitions 
accelerated and exceptional talent to 
grow their careers and experience.

3
To set the standard in being good 
corporate citizens in the way that we 
care for our people, environment and 
the communities we are part of, whilst 
influencing our customers to do the right 
thing wherever we can. 

8

Strategic reportHow we create value

Principles

Customer insights 
Data and analytics, and the insights they reveal, are increasingly 
embedded across the Group; we actively foster innovation 
and the development of products and tools in our businesses 
so that we can do (and prove that we do) the best possible 
work for clients. Our continued, significant investment in data-
driven growth consulting is at the heart of our ability to help 
clients solve problems, innovate and spot new opportunities.

Customer engagement 
The body of content, ideas and expectations surrounding a 
product is what constitutes a brand. Developing digital content 
that travels gracefully across technology platform, application 
and language is essential to consistent brand marketing. 
Creativity doesn’t just apply to content creation though; it 
also applies to the development of the digital assets that will 
be used to engage with customers. For many of today’s 
businesses, these digital points of engagement are now their 
most valuable assets.

Customer delivery 
Building brands is a long-term process and requires a rich set 
of skills and programmes. But as sales and marketing converge 
our clients are looking for ways to identify people ready and 
willing to buy their products and services. A well-engineered 
mixture of first party data, content and algorithms solves this 
problem as the much needed fuel for corporate growth.

Business transformation 
Our marketing heritage helps customers build desire for their 
products. But the pace of change is such that it is no longer 
enough simply to paint the best face on a brand through clever 
marketing. To be effective we have to stand back, think like 
founders and help redesign the company and its products for 
success in fast changing markets. Our consulting capability is 
now helping our customers transform their existing businesses 
or create entirely new ones to grasp emerging opportunities.

Technology
Every business is now, to a greater or lesser extent, a technology 
business. To be the world’s leading growth consultancy we 
must be able to seamlessly combine the best technology, 
communications, product and brand thinking to solve our 
customers’ problems We are experts in applying technology 
to real-world challenges, whether rapidly prototyping new 
products, harnessing the power of social and commerce 
platforms or creating entirely new businesses for our clients.

Approach to acquisitions: strength and success 
We deliver consistently good results for investors because we 
stay true to our principles. These include building a group of 
businesses that organically fit together, are passionate about 
what they do, collaborate rather than compete, and have strong 
leadership teams empowered to pursue their vision of success.

Invest in the best talent 
Our people are at the heart of everything we do. As a Group 
we focus on the ‘who’ before the ‘what’. This principle, espoused 
by the author Jim Collins, creates a different way of running 
a company. It means we trust entrepreneurial talent to drive 
their own businesses and consult with us, but we do not tell 
them what to do.

Growth in core markets
Next 15 will continue to develop its existing brands and make 
acquisitions where the strategic fit and value is compelling. In 
the last few years, the bulk of the Group’s efforts has been 
around strengthening our UK and US businesses as we believe 
our position in these markets continues to provide the greatest 
opportunity for our long-term success.

Diversity and inclusion
The events of 2020 have reinforced our belief that a diverse 
and inclusive workforce are not just a social good, but a 
commercial advantage. Fair practices in hiring and talent 
development, as well as maintaining safe and supportive 
company cultures, are key to the Group’s success and the 
encouragement of diverse voices within it. 

Environment
We are in a privileged position to influence our clients and 
their customers. We intend to use that position to help champion 
positive change on sustainability and our environment. We 
will do this in three ways:

•  use the internationally recognised B Corp framework to 
ensure we continue to be the best corporate citizen we 
can possibly be;

•  influence customers to make sustainable choices whenever 

we do work for them; and

•  create new products and services that help our customers rethink 
their business for the challenges and opportunities ahead.

Customers
Next 15 is careful about choosing which companies it works 
with. It believes its success will be driven by working with 
future facing, purpose-driven customers that share our values. 
This means working with management teams that seek beneficial 
levels of growth that exceed the norm and create businesses 
that have a positive social and environmental impact. By 
selecting customers that share our ambition and our values 
we believe we can deliver meaningful work that has lasting impact.

Next 15 already works with many of the world’s best companies 
and organisations. Much of our future growth can be derived 
from better integration of customer campaigns across the 
Group. This will enable us to deliver better solutions to our 
customers while increasing revenues.

Productisation
As we embrace more data and technology, we also need to 
drive increased productisation across our business. This will, 
in turn, create new, more predictable revenue streams and 
decrease dependence on people/hourly billing.

9

Strategic reportFinancial review

10

Peter Harris
Chief Financial Officer

Penny Ladkin-Brand

Tim Dyson

Helen Hunter

Robyn Perriss

Mark Sanford

Strategic report“ The Group ended up producing a very strong trading 
performance despite the very uncertain trading 
environment brought on by the Covid-19 pandemic.”

A year of strong growth in a tough trading environment
The Group ended up producing a very strong trading 
performance despite the very uncertain trading environment 
brought on by the Covid-19 pandemic. The Group was helped 
by the fact that we had limited exposure to the heavily 
impacted sectors of leisure, travel, retail and hospitality, and 
we are not involved in the live events, traditional media 
buying or sports marketing sectors, which have suffered 
materially over the last twelve months. Approximately 60% 
of our revenue is derived from the tech sector and our B2B 
marketing agencies, which are focused on driving revenue 
for their clients, excelled in the uncertain economic environment 
whilst our B2C agencies recovered well after initial Covid-19 
related client deferrals. 

In order to assist shareholders’ understanding of the underlying 
performance of the business, I have focused my comments 
on the adjusted performance of the business for the 12 months 
to 31 January 2021, compared with the 12 months to 31 January 
2020, in particular the net revenue performance, adjusted 
operating profit and adjusted diluted earnings per share.

The Directors consider these adjusted measures to be highly 
relevant as they reflect the performance of the business 
and align with how shareholders value the business. They 
also allow understandable like for like year on year comparisons 
and more closely correlate with the cash and working capital 
position of the Group. 

Adjusted results
Net revenue
Operating profit after interest on  
finance lease liabilities
Operating profit margin1
Profit before income tax
Diluted earnings per share

Statutory results 
Revenue
Operating profit
(Loss)/profit before income tax
Net cash generated from operations
Diluted earnings per share

Year to
31 January
2021
£m

Year to
31 January
2020
£m

Growth/(decline)
%

266.9

49.5
18.5%
49.1
40.7p

323.7
13.7
(1.3)
72.9
(5.3)p

248.5

40.9
16.4%
40.2
34.8p

300.7
19.4
5.6
49.5
2.5

7%

21%

22%
17%

8%
(29)%
(123)%
47%
(312)%

1 

 Adjusted operating profit margin is calculated based on the operating profit after interest on finance lease liabilities as a percentage of net revenue.

Adjusted results represent the statutory performance, adjusted to exclude amortisation, restructuring charges, brand equity incentive schemes, movements in 
acquisition-related consideration, employment related acquisition payments, property related impairments and certain other items. They are reconciled to the 
statutory results in notes 2, 5 and 10 to the financial statements and within the table on the next page.

More information

Audit Committee report
p36

Financial statements
p76

11

Strategic reportFinancial review continued

A year of strong growth in a tough trading environment 
continued
The Group also presents net revenue which is calculated 
as statutory revenue less direct costs as shown on the 
consolidated income statement and is more closely aligned 
to the fees the Group earns for their product and services.

In line with industry peers, the adjusted profit measures take 
account of items which are not related to trading in the 
current year including amortisation of acquired intangibles, 
property related impairments, brand equity incentive schemes, 
costs associated with restructuring, the receipt of furlough 
grants from the UK Government and certain other items.

While adjusted operating profit increased by 21% to £49.5m 
(2020: £40.9m), reflecting the strong trading of the Group, 
the statutory operating profit declined by 29% to £13.7m 
(2020: £19.4m). The statutory operating profit decline year 
on year is primarily due to the one-off property related 
impairment charge of £10m discussed in further detail below. 
Diluted loss per share was 5.3p, compared with earnings 
per share of 2.5p in the previous year.

Review of adjusted results to 31 January 2021

Group profit and loss account
The last 12 months have been dominated by the impact of 
the Covid-19 pandemic. When the seriousness of the situation 
became apparent in March 2020, we quickly took decisive 
actions to preserve the profitability of our businesses and 
our cash reserves by reducing our staff cost base in line with 
our expectations for reductions in revenue. We also looked 
at our property portfolio and determined that with the changing 
nature of the working environment, we could significantly 
reduce our global property footprint with the medium-term 
ambition of reducing our annual property costs by approximately 
£5m. We saw organic declines in revenue by quarter of 4% 
in Q1, 8% in Q2, before recovering to down 3% in Q3 and 

12

Reconciliation of adjusted operating profit  
to statutory operating profit

Statutory operating profit

Interest on lease liabilities
Share-based payment charge
Employment-related acquisition payments
Deal costs
Costs associated with restructuring
Property impairment
UK Furlough
Amortisation of acquired intangibles

Adjusted operating profit after interest on finance lease liabilities

Year to
31 January
2021
£m

Year to
31 January
2020
£m

13.7

(1.4)
2.4
8.0
0.4
2.8
10.0
(1.4)
15.0

49.5

19.4

(1.6)
0.4
5.0
1.0
4.6
—
—
12.1

40.9

Adjusted results represent the statutory performance, adjusted to exclude amortisation, restructuring charges, brand equity incentive schemes, movements in 
acquisition-related consideration and certain other items. They are reconciled to the statutory results in notes 2 and 5 to the financial statements.

up 2% in Q4. Our B2B agencies proved resilient throughout 
the year, whilst our B2C agencies saw a strong recovery in 
the second half as consumer confidence returned.

Our total group net revenues increased by 7%, but declined 
by 3%1 on an organic basis, whilst our pro-active approach 
to managing our cost base resulted in an increase in the 
adjusted operating profit margin to a record 18.5% from 
16.4% in the prior year. Our B2B agencies including Twogether, 
Agent3 and Activate performed very strongly whilst our B2C 
agencies including Savanta and M Booth agencies recovered 
strongly in the final quarter after being significantly impacted 
by the pandemic in the first half.

As shown in the table above, we incurred £2.4m of share-
based payment charges on new growth shares for M Booth, 
Savanta, Twogether, and ODD, and £8.0m in relation to 
employment-related acquisition payments. We incurred 
£0.4m of deal costs in relation to acquisitions. Amortisation 
of acquired intangibles was £15.0m in the period. We made 

an impairment of £10m against the carrying value of our 
property right of use assets and leasehold improvements. 
We incurred £2.8m of restructuring costs primarily in relation 
to our reaction to the Covid-19 pandemic. These were 
principally staff reductions. 

Taxation 
The adjusted effective tax rate on the Group’s adjusted profit 
for the year to 31 January 2021 was at a rate of 20.2% (2020: 
20.0%), compared to the statutory rate of negative 202% 
(refer to note 8). The adjusted effective tax rate was marginally 
higher than the rate achieved in the previous period as we 
saw a strong performance from our US based agencies, 
where the rate of corporation tax is typically higher than in 
the UK.

The Group notes that Governments around the world are likely 
to increase their rates of corporation tax materially over the 
next few years to help pay for the cost of economic support in 

Strategic reportlight of the pandemic. Therefore it is likely that the Group’s 
adjusted effective rate of tax will increase materially over the 
next few years reflecting these increases. The Group does not 
have any open tax audits, nor does it have any complex structures 
in place to manage its taxes which could give rise to future 
challenges from tax or competition authorities. The Board takes 
a low risk attitude to tax compliance and endeavours to pay 
the appropriate level of tax in all markets the Group operates in. 

Earnings
Diluted adjusted earnings per share has increased by 17% 
to 40.7p for the year to 31 January 2021 compared with 34.8p 
achieved in the prior year, as a result of the improved profitability 
on an adjusted basis.

Segmental review
In order to assist shareholders’ understanding of the key 
growth drivers of the Group, we have included an analysis 
of the results by the operational segments we used to monitor 
the performance of the business for the year ended 31 January 
2021. The three operational segments were Brand Marketing, 
Data and Analytics and Creative Technology. 

As reported in the Chief Executive's statement, the Group 
is adopting an updated strategy, whereby the Group plans 
to deliver growth consulting activities delivered through four 
segments, namely, Customer Insight, Customer Engagement, 
Customer Delivery and Business Transformation. We will be 
reporting against these segments going forward.

Brand Marketing
This segment includes Archetype, Outcast, Nectar, Publitek, 
which are our B2B tech focused agencies. M Booth, our 
B2C focused agency and Blueshirt, our IPO advisory agency. 
The B2B agencies performed well, whilst M Booth recovered 
in the second half after a Covid-impacted first half as clients 
deferred spend. 

Net revenue bridge (£m)

+28.3
+11.4%

-1.2
(0.5%)

266.9
+7.4%

248.5

(0.3)
(0.1%)

(8.4)
(3.4%)

280

275

270

265

260

255

250

245

240

235

230

Year to 
31 January 2020

Discontinued

Organic growth

Acquisitions

Foreign exchange

Year to 
31 January 2021

Segmental review

Year ended 31 January 2021
Net revenue 
Organic revenue (decline)/growth1
Adjusted operating profit/(loss) after interest on 
lease liabilities2
Adjusted operating profit margin2

Year ended 31 January 2020
Net revenue 
Organic revenue (decline)/growth1
Adjusted operating profit/(loss) after interest on 
lease liabilities2
Adjusted operating profit margin2

Brand
Marketing
£’000

Data and
Analytics
£’000

Creative
Technology
£’000

Head
office
£’000

Total
£’000

140,530
(5.5)%

34,573
24.6%

135,036
(5.7)%

29,930
22.2%

48,447
8.2%

13,254
27.4%

45,054
19.3%

12,697
28.2%

77,909
(6.0)%

13,053
16.8%

68,379
(2.1)%

7,774
11.4%

—
—

266,886
(3.4)%

(11,394)
—

49,486
18.5%

—
—

248,469
(2.0)%

(9,541)
—

40,860
16.4%

1 

 Organic growth is the constant currency growth for the 12 months to 31 January 2021 compared to the 12 months to 31 January 2020, excluding the impact of 
acquisitions until they have been in the Group for more than one year.

2 

 Adjusted results are reconciled to the statutory results in notes 2 and 5 to the financial statements.

13

Strategic reportFinancial review continued

Segmental review continued

Brand Marketing continued
Blueshirt had a very strong year on the back of the US tech 
IPO market. Total net revenue increased by 4% to £140.5m 
with an organic decline of 5.5% but the adjusted operating 
profit increased by 15.5% to £34.6m at an improved adjusted 
operating margin of 24.6%.

Data and Analytics 
This segment includes Savanta, our market research agency, 
Activate, our lead generation agency and Planning-inc, our 
data platform agency. Activate produced an outstanding 
performance throughout the year whilst Savanta and Planning-
inc each showed a strong recovery in the second half of 
our financial year on the back of a recovery in consumer 
confidence. The segment produced a positive performance 
overall with net revenue growing by 7% to £48.4m with 
pleasing organic growth of 8.2% and delivered an operating 
profit of £13.3m at an adjusted operating margin of 27.4%. 

Creative Technology
This segment includes our ODD, Elvis, Brandwidth, Beyond, 
Twogether, Conversion Rate Experts, Palladium, Mach49, 
Agent3 and Velocity agencies. Conversion Rate Experts and 
Mach49 were acquired during the year. Overall, the segment 
delivered net revenue growth of 14% to £77.9m with an 
organic net revenue decline of 6%. The adjusted operating 
profit increased by 68% to £13.1m at an improved operating 
profit margin of 16.8%.

Geographical review

US
Our US businesses have proved resilient and continued to 
perform well, despite the challenges of the pandemic. In 
the year to 31 January 2021, total US net revenues grew by 
8.5% to £138.4m from £127.6m which equated to an organic 

decline of 0.8%, taking account of movements in exchange 
rates, and the acquisitions of Nectar, M Booth Health and 
Mach49. Organic growth was impacted by the pandemic, 
but our lead generation agency, Activate, had a very strong 
performance throughout the year, whilst our B2C agency 
M Booth recovered in the second half after initially suffering 
client deferrals as a result of the pandemic. We also took 
decisive action on the cost base with staff reductions and 
a property re-organisation in our key markets of New York 
and San Francisco. The adjusted operating profit from our 
US businesses increased by 29.2% to £34.1m compared 
with £26.4m in the previous 12 months to 31 January 2020, 
with the operating margin increasing to 24.7% from 20.7% 
in the prior year.

the acquisitions of Future Thinking and ComRes into our 
Savanta business. Our UK businesses suffered an organic 
revenue decline of 6.4%, with a recovery in the fourth quarter 
as consumer confidence recovered. The adjusted operating 
profit increased to £22.4m from £20.1m in the prior year with 
the adjusted operating margin increasing to 21.1% from 20.6% 
in the prior year.

EMEA
The EMEA business delivered a solid trading performance. 
Net revenue decreased by 2% to £8.6m (2020: £8.8m) and 
adjusted operating profit increased to £2.0m at an improved 
adjusted operating margin of 23.2%, due to very tight cost control. 

UK
The UK businesses have delivered a resilient performance 
over the last 12 months, with net revenue increasing by 9.1% 
to £106.2m from £97.4m in the prior period. This growth was 
helped by the acquisition of Conversion Rate Experts and 

APAC
Net revenue decreased by 7% to £13.6m (2020: £14.7m), 
however the operating margin increased to 17.1% from 15.6% 
in the prior period and the operating profit remained at a 
very credible £2.3m.

Year ended 31 January 2021

Net revenue 
Organic net revenue growth¹
Adjusted operating profit after interest  
on finance lease liabilities²
Adjusted operating margin²

Year ended 31 January 2020
Net revenue 
Organic net revenue growth¹
Adjusted operating profit after interest  
on finance lease liabilities²
Adjusted operating margin²

UK
£’000

106,247
(6.4)%

22,402
21.1%

97,377
0.3% 

20,094
20.6%

EMEA
£’000

8,610
(4.7)%

1,997
23.2%

8,820
0.4%

1,587
18.0%

USA
£’000

138,383
(0.8)%

34,150
24.7%

127,563
(4.6)% 

26,421
20.7%

APAC
£’000

Head office
£’000

Total
£’000

13,646
(5.5)%

—
—

266,886
(3.4)%

2,331
17.1%

(11,394)
—

49,486
18.5%

14,709
4.8% 

2,299
15.6%

—
—

248,469
(2.0)% 

(9,541)
—

40,860
16.4%

1 

 Organic growth is the constant currency growth for the 12 months to 31 January 2021 compared to the 12 months to 31 January 2020, 
excluding the impact of acquisitions until they have been in the Group for more than one year.

2 

 Adjusted results are reconciled to the statutory results in notes 2 and 5 to the financial statements.

14

Strategic reportCash flow 
The net cash inflow from operating activities before changes 
in working capital for the year to 31 January 2021 increased 
to £66.4m from £52.8m in the prior period. Our management 
of working capital improved with a significant inflow from 
working capital. This resulted in our net cash generated 
from operations being £72.9m (2020: £49.5m). Income taxes 
paid increased to £8.4m from £6.0m. 

Due to the pandemic we decided to cancel the dividends 
which we would have normally paid to Next 15 shareholders 
in the year. But with the stronger than expected financial 
performance for the year to January 2021, we have announced 
a return to the payment of a final dividend for the year to 
31 January 2021 of 7p per share. Net interest paid to the 
Group’s banks was approximately £0.8m (2020: £0.9m).

Government support
During the year to 31 January 2021, the Group utilised various 
Government support schemes, primarily the UK furlough 
scheme and deferral of US social security. In total across 
the Group, £2.1m of government assistance has been recognised 
as a reduction in costs during the year ending 31 January 2021. 
Since the year end, we have committed to repaying the 
furlough monies received from the UK government in full of 
£1.4m, which will be treated as an exceptional item in the 
results for the year to 31 January 2022.

Balance sheet
The Group’s balance sheet remains in a very healthy position 
with net cash as at 31 January 2021 of £14.0m (2020: net 
debt of £9.3m).

Cash flow KPIs

Net cash inflow from operating activities 
Changes in working capital
Net cash generated from operations
Income tax paid
Investing activities
Dividend paid to shareholders
Net cash/(debt)
Net (decrease)/increase in bank borrowings

Treasury and funding
The Group operates a £60m revolving credit facility (‘RCF’) 
with HSBC available until July 2022, having extended it in 
February 2018 to include a £20m term loan. The £40m facility 
is primarily used for acquisitions and is due to be repaid 
from the trading cash flows of the Group. The facility is 
available in a combination of sterling, US dollar and euro at 
an interest margin dependent upon the level of gearing in 
the business. The term loan of £20m has been fully drawn 
down and is repayable in equal annual instalments; the last 
repayment is due in December 2021. The Group also has 
a US facility of $7m (2020: $7m) which is available for property 
rental guarantees and US-based working capital needs. 

As part of the facilities agreement, Next 15 has to comply 
with a number of covenants, including maintaining the multiple 
of net bank debt before earn-out obligations to adjusted 
EBITDA below 1.75x and the level of net bank debt including 
earn-out obligations to adjusted EBITDA below 2.5x. Next 15 
has ensured that it has complied with all of its covenant 
obligations with significant headroom.

Peter Harris
Chief Financial Officer
12 April 2021

Year to
31 January
2021
£m

Year to
31 January
2020
£m

66.4
6.6
72.9
(8.4)
(27.0)
—
14.0
(24.9)

52.8
(3.3)
49.5
(6.0)
(28.3)
(6.8)
(9.3)
13.0

15

Strategic reportHow we manage our risks

“ The effective management of risk is critical to supporting 
the delivery of the Group’s strategic objectives.”

Next 15 is exposed to a variety of risks that can have financial, 
operational and regulatory impact on our business performance, 
reputation and prosperity. The Board recognises that creating 
shareholder returns is the reward for taking and accepting 
risk. The effective management of risk is therefore critical 
to supporting the delivery of the Group’s strategic objectives. 

Risk management
The focus of the Risk Management Framework is the annual 
risk assessment which takes place at an operating company 
level performed by brand management, and by Next 15 
senior leaders for the Group-wide risks. The outcome of 
this bottom-up / top-down assessment is presented to the 
Board for review and challenge. The risk management 
activities are aligned with the risk appetite of the Group, as 
determined by the Board. 

Day to day risk management and control is the responsibility 
of the Group Executive Team, with Board oversight, and is 
designed to ensure that Group management provide direction 
and leadership to the brands so that they can operate in 
accordance with the Group’s risk appetite. As part of this 
the Group develop and provide the brands with the policies 
and processes to enable them to manage risk. The internal 
audit team assesses our risks and controls independently 
and objectively. 

Internal controls
The Board has ultimate responsibility for the Group’s system 
of internal control and regularly reviews its effectiveness in 
accordance with revised guidance on internal controls 
published by the Financial Reporting Council. This control 
system, which centres around a supporting set of minimum 
controls, is designed to manage rather than eliminate risk 
of failure to achieve business objectives. It also provides 
reasonable but not absolute assurance that assets are 
safeguarded against unauthorised use or material loss, that 
its transactions are properly authorised and recorded, and 
that material errors and irregularities are prevented or, failing 
which, are discovered on a timely basis. 

Internal audit
The Group Internal Audit function provides assurance over 
the Group’s control environment. The results of internal audit 
activities are reported to the Audit Committee at each Audit 
Committee meeting and the risk-based internal audit plan 
updated as required to respond to the risks faced by the Group.

Board oversight
The Board gains assurance over the adequacy of design 
and operation of internal controls across the Group through 
the following process:

•  significant findings from internal audit engagements are 
reported to management, the executive directors and the 
Audit Committee. Reporting covers significant risk exposures 
and control issues, including fraud risks, governance 
issues and other matters needed or requested by the Board;

•  depending on the risk associated with any weaknesses 
noted, recommendations are followed up and reported 
back to the Audit Committee until they are adequately 
resolved; and

•  internal audit independently reviews the risk identification 
procedures and control processes implemented by 
management and advises on policy and procedure changes. 

During its review of the risk management and internal control 
systems, the Board has not identified nor been advised of 
any, failings or weaknesses, which it has determined to be 
significant. Therefore, a confirmation in respect of necessary 
actions has not been considered appropriate.

Whistle blowing and Bribery Act 2010
Whistle blowing procedures are in place for individuals to 
report suspected breaches of law or regulations or other 
malpractice. The Group has implemented an anti-bribery 
code of conduct which is intended to extend to all the 
Group’s business dealings and transactions in all countries 
in which it or its subsidiaries and associates operate.

16

Strategic reportPrincipal risks and uncertainties

The risks outlined below are those that the executive Directors and the Board believe are the principal and material risks of the 
Group. The matters described below are not intended to be an exhaustive list of possible risks and uncertainties and it should be 
noted that additional risks, which the Group does not consider material, or of which it is not aware, could have an adverse impact.

Risk description

Operational risk

Coronavirus (Covid-19)
Covid-19 has created an unprecedented global emergency, the effects of which will have 
a lasting impact on both people and economies alike.

The extent of the risk and the length of time the economic impact will remain is uncertain. 
However, as a technology-centred business, we have been able to respond quickly to 
protect our employees, customers and the business.

The Group has been impacted by some spending cuts by its clients in impacted sectors 
such as hospitality and travel. However, the Group has been protected through the majority 
of its customers being business to business technology customers. 

Macroeconomic uncertainty
The macroeconomic environment continues to be volatile as a result of key drivers. 
Examples being uncertainties caused by Brexit in the UK and the Covid-19 pandemic.

Seen as more discretionary when compared to other operating costs, marketing and 
innovation budgets have historically been reduced by clients during weakened economic 
and financial conditions. The risk of client loss or reduction in marketing budgets is therefore 
increased in times of macroeconomic uncertainty or change.

Mitigating actions

Change
in risk

We have implemented our business continuity plan and have adopted working practices 
that, while different, have worked to minimise the disruption on our business-as-usual  operations.

D

The Group took reasonable precautions through monitoring working capital, cash flow 
and our sales pipeline. The Group furloughed a number of employees during the year, 
and pay reductions were taken by the Board and senior leadership across the Group. The 
situation, while disruptive, has also presented opportunities for challenging the way we 
work and ensuring that we innovate to continue to best serve our customer’s need in a 
post-Covid environment.

We will continue to monitor the situation and are ready to take further action if needed.

The impact of this is dependent on sector focus and often brands which lack diversification 
are more exposed to macroeconomic risk. The Group’s strategy of building a portfolio of 
brands which is diversified across different communications markets and geographic 
regions minimises the risk that the Group is overly reliant on any one territory, sector 
or client.

Business continuity
There is a risk that unforeseen circumstances could arise, which mean that the business 
is unable to operate, such as natural disasters, property damage, systems failure or absence 
of significant personnel.

There are business continuity plans in place across the Group to ensure that we can 
continue to deliver world-class service to our customers in case of a significant business 
disruption. These have proven effective during the coronavirus crisis.

In addition, the Group has insurance cover in place to mitigate against business disruption. 

C

B

17

Strategic reportPrincipal risks and uncertainties continued

Risk description

Operational risk continued

Mitigating actions

Data protection and privacy
The Group stores, transmits and relies on critical and sensitive data such as personally 
identifiable information and the intellectual property of customers. Security of this type of 
data is exposed to escalating external threats that are increasing in sophistication as well 
as internal data breaches.

The introduction of the California Consumer Privacy Act (“CCPA”) further increases the 
regulatory rigour that the Group faces.

There is a risk that if the Group has not implemented suitable procedures and updated 
relevant business processes, it may inadvertently breach its regulatory and contractual 
obligations leading to fines, client delays and reputational damage.

Our response to data protection and privacy is intrinsically linked with our information 
security programme, including the maintenance of Group-wide policies. This framework 
provides a strong platform from which to preserve the integrity of business information 
and ensure compliance with local legal requirements.

Next 15 employed a new Chief Technology Officer in December 2020. He is now leading 
a team which is reviewing the current Group-wide compliance with data protection 
legislation, and putting in place guidance, training and processes for compliance.

System access and security
The Group notes the ongoing threat of third parties attempting to exploit weaknesses in 
the technological infrastructure and SaaS services of different companies.

The ongoing development and maturation of our Information Security Management System, 
including the continued investment in endpoint security and threat intelligence, has greatly 
increased our ability to monitor and respond to cyber-related threats.

Inadequate security controls to protect against these threats could lead to business 
disruption, reputational damage and loss of assets.

Our people are also required to undertake ongoing training to maintain their awareness 
and understanding of information security.

People and talent – retention and recruitment
Our people are our most important asset.

The Group relies on highly skilled employees, who are vital to its success in building and 
maintaining client relationships and winning new work. We are also heavily reliant on the 
leaders of the underlying businesses and losing one of those individuals could be particularly 
detrimental.

An active succession planning and talent management strategy is important to ensure 
that we are not vulnerable to business disruption from the loss of key personnel.

An ambitious growth strategy also means the skills and capabilities of existing team 
members may not be suitable as our businesses grow. Challenging the nature and breadth 
of roles being undertaken by key people is critical for ensuring the sustainability of 
our success.

Our approach to recruitment is to hire best-in-class talent and remunerate them accordingly.

Next 15 understands that the expectations on employers and what employees “want” from 
a job is changing and a failure to evolve may result in a loss of key talent or a lack of 
experienced talent filtering up the business. We are therefore committed to helping develop 
our staff and helping carve out a career within the wider group if so desired.

The Group carries out succession planning and provides promotion opportunities as well 
as operating both short-term and long-term incentive plans to motivate and retain key individuals.

Change
in risk

C

B

B

Compliance with laws and regulations
The Group operates in a large number of jurisdictions and, as a consequence, is subject 
to a range of regulations.

The Group has maintained an in-house legal function over the whole of its life as a public 
company and also uses external legal counsel to advise on local legal and regulatory 
requirements.

B

Any failure to respond quickly to legislative requirements could result in civil or criminal 
liabilities, leading to fines, penalties or restrictions being placed upon the Group’s ability 
to trade, resulting in reduced sales and profitability and reputational damage.

The Group has an in-house tax function to ensure compliance with tax legislation globally, 
which consults with external advisers.

Furthermore, consideration of regulatory compliance is included in the assurance programme 
led by the Internal Audit function.

18

Strategic reportRisk description

Strategic risk

Mitigating actions

Reliance on key clients
Losing a major client unexpectedly can have a significant impact on the resourcing, revenue 
and profit of an individual brand. The impact of this will depend on the particular brand involved.

Our top ten largest clients accounted for ~22% of revenues this year. The loss of a major client 
would create significant pressure if not replaced by new accounts or an increase in business 
from existing clients.

Failure to evolve service offering
The Group continues to innovate and invest to develop market-leading offerings to our 
customers. However, the speed of change and perceived opportunities in the industry 
has meant more companies, including non-traditional players, are developing their digital 
marketing capability and thus shifting the competitive landscape.

There is a risk to our ongoing growth and market position if we don’t respond to the pace 
of change and be at the forefront of technological solutions to stay ahead of the competition.

Remuneration and incentive schemes
The Group operates numerous earn-out mechanisms and incentive schemes in order to attract 
and retain senior talent across the Group. As we look to be flexible in how we incentivise our 
talent these schemes can be complex. This gives rise to a local risk of management override 
and financial misreporting.

In addition, culturally, there is a risk that earn-outs will encourage a ‘silo culture’ and discourage 
collaboration between the brands, or that the incentive mechanisms encourage the wrong 
behaviour or do not appropriately incentivise our key staff.

Acquisitions – Choice of acquisition targets and delivery of expected growth
The Group’s growth strategy has always centred around investing in talent and the 
acquisition of businesses which broaden and enhance existing business operations. One 
of the inherent risks of acquisitions is that the Group enters unfamiliar markets/regions 
and works with new personnel, who may not be sufficiently aligned with Group strategy. 
The acquisition may therefore not generate the financial or commercial benefit it was 
intended to.

Integration of new acquisitions, particularly when they are being bolted onto an existing 
business, can be challenging and time consuming. There is a risk that the integration 
distracts the acquiring business, or capacity issues limits the enhancement of synergies 
resulting in the growth identified during due diligence remaining uncapitalised.

Change
in risk

D

C

The Group’s strategy is to build a portfolio of brands which is diversified across different 
communications markets and geographic regions. As well as growing organically, the 
Group expands through acquisitions which typically increases the diversification of the 
Group. 

The Board regularly reviews the Group’s reliance on key customers through top ten client 
analysis in the management accounts and reviews of customers with revenues greater 
than $1m per annum.

The Group follows a strategy of focusing acquisitions on technology-driven marketing 
agencies. It also encourages all the brands to have data and technology at the centre of 
their business.

The Group continues to diversify its service offering, both organically and through acquisition, 
to provide world-class marketing, data and analytics, creative consulting and innovative 
consulting services.

The group has a defined framework from which all new incentive schemes are developed. 
The framework creates standardisation and sets a minimum expectation for all our leaders.

B

The Remuneration Committee reviews, challenges and approves all incentive schemes 
across the Group. External advisers are used where necessary to advise the Board and 
individuals on any new schemes.

The Board is very careful when selecting potential acquisition partners and we spend a 
significant amount of time upfront to make sure the individuals are a good fit for the Group.

B

Robust due diligence is performed prior to all acquisitions, with representations, warranties 
and indemnities being obtained from vendors where possible. The consideration paid for 
a business typically includes a significant element of deferred consideration, contingent 
upon future performance. Vendors are also encouraged to retain a minority equity stake 
to ensure their retention within the Group.

Internal Audit works with newly acquired businesses to ensure that they are integrated 
into the Group’s control environment.

19

Strategic reportPrincipal risks and uncertainties continued

Risk description

Strategic risk continued

Mitigating actions

Change
in risk

Sustainable practices
It is a moral and commercial necessity that our business ensures society and the environment 
is enriched, not degraded, by our operations, even more so in the context of the current 
environmental crisis and societal inequality. Without demonstrable action, there is risk that 
we will struggle to retain and recruit talent, as well as retain and win clients who are 
committed to sustainable business practices and innovation.

The marketing sector has an important role to play in engaging and influencing businesses 
to innovate and consumers to choose the sustainable products they create. 

C

We are actively developing a sustainability strategy which considers the holistic impact 
of our operations. A number of actions are in progress including (but not limited to): an 
assessment of our own environmental footprint with a view to adopting climate metric 
reporting; a review of our active client and supplier base; and standardisation of policies 
and procedures.

Financial risk

Fraud and misreporting
Particularly in smaller brands with fewer opportunities to segregate duties, there is a risk 
that without appropriate oversight and review, there could be fraudulent activity and 
misreporting of financial information.

The risk of misappropriation and fraud is also increased due to the siloed nature of the 
Next 15 operating model and the level of influence founders can have within their specific 
company environments.

Overseen by the Audit Committee, the Internal Audit function provides assurance of the 
Group’s control environment, with particular focus given to segregation of duties. 

B

The consolidation of the Group’s banking facility under HSBC gives the Group greater 
control and visibility over its cash balances.

It is mandated that all of the businesses have to adopt the Group’s finance, tax and banking 
systems, which provides the head office team with a lot of oversight of the day to day 
transactions within the Group’s operations.

The annual External Audit also provides comfort.

Currency risk
As a global business, currency fluctuations continue to have a potential impact on the 
Group’s translated results. The Group is listed in the UK with sterling as its functional 
currency but makes the majority of its profit outside of the UK.

As a result, the Group’s reported profits and asset values are impacted by any fluctuation 
of Sterling relative to other currencies, particularly the US Dollar. The Group may also 
suffer restrictions on the ability to repatriate cash, particularly for our operations in India 
and China.

Most of the Group’s revenue is matched by costs arising in the same currency. Foreign 
exchange exposure is continually monitored, and net investment hedges are used where 
appropriate for significant foreign currency investments.

B

The global and local short-term cash flow forecasts are used to monitor future large foreign 
currency payments, and natural currency hedging is used where possible across the 
Group.

Surplus cash balances are swept to the UK to minimise any exposure to particular currencies 
or locations.

Tim Dyson
Chief Executive Officer

20

Strategic reportSection 172(1) statement

The Directors are fully aware of their duty to promote the success of the Company for the benefit of its members as a whole in accordance with section 172 of the Companies Act 
2006, and in doing so to have regard to the matters set out in section 172(1) (a) – (f).

The corporate governance report on p26 to 35 as well as the chairman’s corporate governance statement available at www.next15.com set out how the Directors have engaged with 
the Group’s shareholders, employees and wider workforce, customers, suppliers and wider communities and the environment. On p33 we explain how the Board has set the Group’s 
culture to ensure that decisions are taken in line with the Group’s values and objectives.

The principal long-term risks to the Group are set out as Strategic Risks on p16 to 20, and the mitigating actions explained on those pages set how the Directors consider those risks 
and the resulting actions taken.

The following examples demonstrate how the Directors had regard to the respective elements of section 172 in discharging their duties:

The likely 
consequences 
of any decision 
in the long term
Further information can 
be  found  on  pages  8 
and 9

The interests of the 
Company’s employees
Further information can 
be found on pages 30 
to 34

The Board takes a long-term approach to developing its strategy taking into account for instance the impact of technology, changes in customer behaviour, 
client needs and other external factors. In implementing that strategy, the acquisition of Mach49, LLC. was a step towards the Board’s strategic objective 
of building a material scale innovation division. Other relevant principal decisions during the year include decisions in respect of cancelling the Group’s 
final and interim dividends, repaying the UK support provided by the UK Government furlough scheme, the introduction of a new annual 3-point planning 
process for our brands, continued investment in the Group’s cyber security infrastructure and a radical restructure of our global property portfolio. Assisted 
by the executive and the Company Secretary, the Board continuously engages with the business on the decision-making process and how their decisions 
impact the Company’s key stakeholders.

Next 15 is all about people. We maintain that our success is fundamentally driven by the talent and effort of our workforce. The Board recognises that the 
interaction between the Board, and senior management of Next 15 and our Brands, is crucial to maintaining the welfare of our people and ultimately our 
future success. The pandemic presented unique challenges to our Brands so the executive initiated weekly meetings with the Brand CEOs to provide 
guidance and support, especially when having to make difficult decisions concerning our people. Tim Dyson continues to hold regular meetings with the 
Brand CEOs and in turn, each CEO is encouraged to engage fully with their staff. A fortnightly CEO town hall is now run where Tim Dyson updates the 
CEO’s on group initiatives. This forum also provides an opportunity to share knowledge across the group and drive collaboration. During the year we have 
worked on producing an employee handbook which is being launched to all Brands via a new learning and development platform. The whole Board met 
with the Group’s senior leadership in October 2020, taking part in three days of workshops where the Board engaged in a dialogue with management 
around their and their staff’s feedback, with particular focus on support and resilience during the Covid-19 era. During the year the Board initiated an audit 
of the Diversity, Equity and Inclusion status of all brands within the group to establish baseline data and inform our action plans. 

The need to foster the 
company’s business 
relationships with 
suppliers, customers 
and others
Further information can 
be found on pages 30 
to 34

Our business relies on good relationships with clients, suppliers and other stakeholders. The Board is regularly briefed on key developments across our 
Brands, including on new and existing client relationships. Client due diligence is a key part of our acquisition process when evaluating potential acquisition 
targets and results are made available to the Board. By their nature our businesses work in collaboration with their clients: we embed teams within client 
organisations, use agile processes, and build businesses to better serve client needs based on what they tell us. The Group has a zero-tolerance approach 
to practices which are at odds with our values and culture, for example corruption, bribery and modern slavery. We are committed to acting ethically and 
with integrity in all business dealings and relationships and to implementing and enforcing effective systems and controls to ensure such practices are not 
taking place anywhere in our businesses or supply chain. An ethics group drawn from our CEOs has been established to help us put these values into 
action in terms of the way we work and the clients we work with. 

21

Strategic reportSection 172(1) statement continued

The impact of the 
company’s operations 
on the community and 
the environment
Further information can 
be found on pages 30 
to 31

The desirability of the 
company maintaining 
a reputation for high 
standards of business 
conduct
Further information can 
be found on pages 30 
to 34

The need to act fairly 
as between members 
of the company
Further information can 
be found on pages 32 
and 33

We continue to increase the focus on our impact on the environment. We are actively developing a sustainability strategy which considers the holistic impact 
of our operations and using the framework set out by the B Corp movement to help us do so. As a result, a number of actions are in progress including 
(but not limited to): engagement of specialist support to measure our environmental footprint, setting out new baseline policies for how we look after our 
staff and the creation of a cross-group Diversity, Equity and Inclusion council with representation at all staff levels. The Group's approach to environmental 
and social impact matters is set out on pages 30 to 31.

We continue to have a corporate culture based on entrepreneurial spirit and personal responsibility. Businesses within the Group are given a high degree 
of autonomy in line with the Group’s emphasis on personal responsibility. We continue to prioritise Head Office as enablers and consultants to our Brands, 
however, the weekly calls initiated by the executive have proven invaluable in increasing oversight into, and informing, business processes and strategy. 
The Board and its Committees are ultimately responsible for setting high standards for ethical behaviour which is implemented, reviewed and monitored 
by the Head Office team. Processes are in place to ensure the Group complies with applicable laws and regulation. During the year, as part of the project 
to launch the revised employee handbook, an extensive review of policy has begun, which we aim to conclude in 2021. Appropriate policies and procedures 
are in place to ensure the Group complies with relevant legislation and regulations.

The Board recognises the critical importance of open dialogue and fair consideration of the Company’s members. We communicate with our shareholders 
through our annual report and accounts, full-year and half-year results announcements, trading updates, AGMs, face-to-face meetings and investor days. 
In early 2021 we engaged directly with our institutional shareholders concerning proposed changes to executive and non-executive remuneration following 
an extensive benchmarking exercise undertaken by our remuneration consultants, Korn Ferry. More information on our engagement with shareholders is 
set out pages 32 and 33.

22

Strategic reportBoard of Directors and 
Company Secretary
p24

Corporate governance 
statement
p26

Audit Committee report
p36

Directors’ remuneration report
p40

Report of the Directors
p58

Directors’ responsibilities 
statement
p61

E
T
A
R
O
P
R
O
C

E
C
N
A
N
R
E
V
O
G

Independent auditors’ report
p62

Consolidated income 
statement
p76

Consolidated balance sheet
p78

Consolidated statement of 
changes in equity
p80

Consolidated statement of 
cash flow
p82

I

L
A
C
N
A
N
I
F

S
T
N
E
M
E
T
A
T
S

Notes to the accounts
p84

Company balance sheet
p136

Company statement of changes 
in equity
p138

Notes forming part of the 
Company financial statements
p139

Five-year financial information
p147

23

Strategic reportBoard of Directors and Company Secretary

Penny Ladkin-Brand

Tim Dyson

Peter Harris

Helen Hunter

Penny Ladkin-Brand
Chair
Appointed July 2017

A

R

Penny is Non-Executive Chair and a 
member of the Audit and Remuneration 
Committees.

Penny joined Next 15 as a Non-Executive 
Director and chair of the Audit Committee. 
In April 2020 she was also appointed 
as Senior Independent Director and from 
February 2021 became Chair of the Board.

Skills and experience
Penny is also Chief Strategy Officer at 
Future plc, a global platform for specialist 
media. She was previously Chief Financial 
Officer at Future during which time the 
group’s market capitalisation increased 
from £25m to £1.2bn and entered the 
FTSE 250 as it became a digital led 
business.  Prior  to  that,  Penny  was 
Commercial Director at Auto Trader Group 
plc responsible for digital monetisation. 
Penny brings considerable experience 
of digital transformation and M&A to the 
Board. Penny qualified as a Chartered 
Accountant with PwC before moving 
into corporate finance. Penny is a NED 
and Chair of the Audit Committee at 
ATG plc.

24

Tim Dyson
Chief Executive Officer 
Appointed August 1988

Tim joined the Group in 1984 straight 
from Loughborough University and became 
CEO in 1992.

Skills and experience
As one of the early pioneers of tech PR, 
he has worked on major corporate and 
product campaigns with such companies 
as Cisco, Microsoft, IBM, Sun and Intel. 
Tim moved from London to set up the 
Group’s first US business in 1995 in Seattle 
and  is  now  based  in  California.  Tim 
oversaw the flotation of the Company 
on the London Stock Exchange and has 
managed a string of successful acquisitions 
by the Group including The Outcast 
Agency, M Booth, Activate and The 
Blueshirt Group in the US as well as 
Morar (now Savanta), Elvis, Velocity, 
Planning-inc and Publitek in the UK. 

Outside Next 15, Tim has served on 
advisory boards of a number of emerging 
technology companies. Tim was named 
an Emerging Power Player by PR Week 
US and subsequently in PR Week’s Power 
Book. Tim was also recognised on the 
Holmes Report’s In2’s Innovator 25, which 
recognises  individuals  who  have 
contributed ideas that set the bar for 
the industry.

Peter Harris
Chief Financial Officer 
Appointed March 2014

Peter joined Next 15 as its Chief Financial 
Officer  in  November  2013  and  was 
appointed as an Executive Director in 
March 2014. 

Skills and experience
Peter’s financial experience spans 30 
years  and  he  has  extensive  media 
experience, having spent the last 20 
years in finance roles in the media sector. 
From July 2013 until December 2018, 
he was a Non-Executive Director of 
Communisis plc and Chairman of its Audit 
Committee. He was previously the Interim 
Finance Director at Centaur Media plc, 
Interim CFO of Bell Pottinger LLP, CFO 
of the Engine Group, and CFO of 19 
Entertainment. Prior to that, he was Group 
Finance Director of Capital Radio plc. 
Peter has considerable experience in 
UK  and  US-listed  companies,  with 
international exposure.

Helen Hunter
Non-Executive Director 
Appointed June 2019

A

R

As a Non-Executive Director of Next 15, 
Helen chairs the Remuneration Committee 
and is a member of the Audit Committee.

Skills and experience
Helen is Chief Data and Analytics Officer 
at J Sainsbury plc where her remit is to 
maximise the value of the Group’s data 
assets: democratising access and finding 
creative ways to unlock its insight potential 
in support of Sainsbury’s strategy. Over 
the last nine years at Sainsbury’s in roles 
including Director of Innovation, Director 
of Marketing Strategy & Innovation, and 
Director of Customer Data & Relationships, 
she  has  developed  products  and 
propositions such as Sainsbury’s Brand 
Match and digital Nectar. Helen is also 
currently a Governor of Lancing College. 
Before joining Sainsbury’s, she held roles 
at emnos, Home Retail Group, Woolworths 
Group, and Kingfisher.

GovernanceKey

  Chair of Committee

A   Audit Committee

R   Remuneration Committee

Robyn Perriss 

Mark Sanford

Mark Sanford
General Counsel and 
Company Secretary
Appointed February 2021

Skills and experience
Having qualified as a solicitor at Eversheds, 
Mark worked in their Corporate team 
before moving to his first in-house role 
at Premier Farnell plc. Mark first joined 
Next 15 in 2003 as General Counsel 
and Company Secretary. In 2009 he set 
up his own boutique law firm Baker 
Sanford LLP while continuing to provide 
an  outsourced  legal  and  company 
secretarial function to Next 15. In 2017 
Mark became General Counsel and 
Company Secretary of Ebiquity plc, an 
AIM-listed media consultancy business. 
He re-joined Next 15 in February 2021.

Robyn Perriss 
Non-Executive Director
Appointed November 2020

A

R

Robyn joined Next 15 as a Non-Executive 
Director and member of the Audit and 
Remuneration Committees. From February 
2021 she was appointed Chair of the 
Audit Committee.

Skills and experience
Robyn has significant experience in both 
the technology and media industries, 
having served as Finance Director at 
Rightmove plc, the UK’s largest property 
portal, until June 2020. Robyn previously 
held senior roles at Rightmove, including 
as Financial Controller and Company 
Secretary. Before joining Rightmove, 
Robyn was Group Financial Controller 
at Auto Trader, another media sector 
disruptor. Robyn joined Softcat plc, a 
leading provider of IT infrastructure to 
the corporate and public sectors, as a 
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the 
Audit Committee in July 2019. She is 
also a Non-Executive Director and chair 
of the Audit Committee for Dr Martens 
plc.  Robyn  qualified  as  a  Chartered 
Accountant in South Africa with KPMG 
and worked in both audit and transaction 
services.

25

GovernanceAn introduction from our Chair
On behalf of the Board I am pleased to present the corporate 
governance report for the year ended 31 January 2021.

The Directors recognise that shareholders look to the Board 
to promote the long-term success of the Company and I 
recognise that effective governance is crucial to achieving 
this.  In this section of our report we have set out our approach 
to governance and provided further detail on how the Board 
and its Committees operate.

The Board has continued to apply the Quoted Companies 
Alliance Corporate Governance Code (the ‘QCA Code’). The 
corporate governance framework which the Group operates, 
including  Board  leadership  and  effectiveness,  Board 
remuneration, and internal controls is based upon practices 
which the Board believes are proportional to the size, risks, 
complexity and operations of the businesses within the Group.

During the year, we concluded the orderly transition of the 
Board Chair role from Richard Eyre to me and refreshed 
and added further diversity to the Board with the appointment 
of Robyn Perriss as a Non-Executive Director and Chair of 
the Audit Committee. In addition, we undertook a comprehensive 
independent evaluation of the Board’s and Committees’ 

effectiveness with an external specialist board evaluation 
firm. This robust exercise revealed a positive picture of a 
Board that is working well across the key areas of board 
effectiveness, governance and performance. We have 
embraced the recommendations from the external board 
evaluation and have developed a roadmap to implement 
these as part of our strong focus on our governance framework.

As Chair I am responsible for leading the Board and for its 
governance of the Group. I look forward to building on 
Richard Eyre’s successful tenure as Chair and to working 
with the Board to progress continual improvements of our 
board effectiveness and governance framework to promote 
the long-term success of the Group.

We welcome feedback from our shareholders at all times 
and I encourage all to participate in our AGM.

Penny Ladkin-Brand
Chair
12 April 2021

Corporate governance statement

Penny Ladkin-Brand
Chair

“ I look forward to building on 
Richard Eyre’s successful tenure 
as Chair and to working with the 
Board to progress continual 
improvements of our board 
effectiveness and governance 
framework to promote the long-
term success of the Group.”

26

GovernanceStatement of compliance
Next 15 has adopted the QCA Code and is compliant with 
all of its principles. Disclosures required by the QCA Code 
have been made both in this annual report and on our 
website. Further information on the Company’s compliance 
with the QCA Code can be found on the Group’s website 
at www.next15.com, on the AIM Rule 26 page. 

The Composition of the Board
The Board is responsible for the strategic direction, investment 
decisions and effective control of the Group. During the 
year ended 31 January 2021 the Board comprised two 
Executive Directors, a Non-Executive Chairman and three 
Non-Executive Directors. 

On 7 May 2020, the Company announced that Richard Eyre 
CBE would complete nine years as Chairman of the Board 
on 11 May 2020 and Penny Ladkin-Brand, who chaired the 
Audit Committee from July 2017, would become Chair of the 
Board with effect from 1 February 2021. Penny became 
Senior Independent Director with effect from 7 May 2020 
and Richard agreed to continue in post to the end of the 
financial year, to support a smooth transition. During that 
time, Penny Ladkin-Brand stepped down from the position 
of Chief Financial Officer and as an Executive Director of 
Future plc, a global platform for specialist media, and took 
up the role of Chief Strategy Officer at Future plc. Richard 
retired from the Board on 31 January 2021 and Penny 
succeeded him as Chair of the Board from that date, and 
stepped down as Senior Independent Director and Chair 
of the Audit Committee.

Robyn Perriss joined the Board on 12 November 2020, as 
a Non-Executive Director and member of the Audit and 
Remuneration Committees. From February 2021 she was 
appointed Chair of the Audit Committee. Robyn brings 
significant expertise of growth through digital disruption as 
well as governance and strategic oversight, making her a 
valuable addition to the Board as Next 15 continues its 
progress in technology-driven marketing. Robyn served as 
Finance Director at Rightmove plc, the UK’s largest property 
portal until 30 June 2020 and previously held senior roles 
at Rightmove, including as Financial Controller and Company 
Secretary. Before joining Rightmove, Robyn was Group 
Financial Controller at Auto Trader, another media sector 
disruptor. Robyn joined Softcat plc, a leading provider of IT 
infrastructure to the corporate and public sectors, as a 
Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Audit Committee 
in July 2019 and in January 2021 was appointed to the board 
of Dr Martens Limited, as a Non-Executive Director, on its 
floatation on the London Stock Exchange. 

Biographies of each of the Board Directors, including the 
Committees on which they serve and chair, are shown on 
pages 24 and 25.

The Board is satisfied that, between the Directors, it has an 
effective and appropriate balance of skills and knowledge, 
including a range of financial, commercial and entrepreneurial 
experience. The Board is also satisfied that it has a suitable 
balance between independence (of character and judgement) 
and knowledge of the Company to enable it to discharge 
its duties and responsibilities effectively. The Non-Executive 
Directors are considered to be independent. No single 
Director is dominant in the decision-making process.

The Board aims to convene nine times a year, with additional 
meetings being held as required. The Covid-19 pandemic 
has meant that there were more meetings than usual and 
all meetings have been held virtually during the year. It is 
anticipated that following the change to adopt virtual working, 
and as Tim Dyson is located in California, that around half 
of the Board meetings will continue to be held virtually going 
forward. Details of Board and Committee meetings held 
during the financial year and the attendance records of 
individual Directors can be found on page 28.

The Board meets once a year to discuss the Group’s strategy. 
This year, the Board participated in workshops with representatives 
from the Group’s businesses focusing on the future of the 
Group and how it could serve its stakeholders better.

Prior to their appointment, the Company informed each 
Director of the nature of their role, their responsibilities and 
duties to the Company, and the time commitment involved. 
On appointment each Director confirmed that, taking into 
account all of their other commitments, they were able to 
allocate sufficient time to the Company to discharge their 
role effectively. The Board is satisfied that the Chair and the 
Non-Executive Directors each devote sufficient time to the 
Company and that there have been no significant changes 
to their other commitments.

27

GovernanceCorporate governance statement continued

Board and Committee attendance for the year ended 
31 January 2021
Attendance records for the Board and Committee meetings 
held during the year are shown below. These include both 
scheduled Board, Audit Committee and Remuneration 
Committee meetings and further meetings that were convened 
as required throughout the year. In particular, the Board met 
more frequently as the Covid-19 situation developed, in 
order to assess and respond to the uncertainty, challenges 
and opportunities which this created for the business. Additional 
Committees of the Board were also constituted to review 
and approve certain acquisitions, and regulatory news 
announcements. Other members of the senior management 
and brand management teams, as well as advisers, attended 
Board and Committee meetings by invitation as appropriate 
throughout the year.

Board

Audit

Remuneration

Richard Eyre CBE

Tim Dyson

Peter Harris

Penny Ladkin-Brand

Helen Hunter

Robyn Perriss1

14 of 14

14 of 14

14 of 14

14 of 14

13 of 14

2 of 2

6 of 6

10 of 10

—

—

6 of 6

6 of 6

1 of 1

—

—

10 of 10

10 of 10

1 of 2

1  Robyn Perriss joined the Board on 12 November 2020.

The Board’s responsibilities and processes
The principal matters considered by the Board during the 
period included:

•  the Group’s strategy, budget and financial resources;

•  the Group’s performance and outlook, including that of 

individual brands;

•  the Group’s financial results for the interim and year end;

•  Information Security Management System (‘ISMS’) arrangements 

across the Group including cyber security;

•  assessing and responding to the uncertainty, challenges 
and opportunities from the Covid-19 pandemic and Brexit;

•  review of the Group’s risk management and internal controls;

•  review of opportunities to expand by acquisition;

•  post-integration monitoring of acquisitions; and

•  corporate governance matters including QCA Code 
compliance Board evaluation outcomes and succession 
planning.

There is a schedule of matters specifically reserved for 
decision by the Board which is regularly reviewed and available 
from the Group’s website at www.next15.com.

At each Board meeting, the Chief Executive Officer provides 
a business review and the Chief Financial Officer provides 
a financial review. Board members receive monthly trading 
results, together with detailed commentary. Each Director 
receives a Board pack in advance of each meeting which 
includes a formal agenda together with supporting papers 
for items to be discussed at the meeting. 

All Directors have access to the advice and services of the 
Company Secretary, who is responsible for ensuring that 
Board procedures are followed and that the Company complies 
with all applicable rules, regulations and obligations. Directors 
may take independent professional advice at the Company’s 
expense, as and when necessary to support the performance 
of their duties as Directors of the Company. Appropriate 
induction and training for new and existing Directors is 
provided where required.

Appointment, election and re-election of Directors
Appointments to the Board are the responsibility of the 
Board as a whole. From February 2021, the Board has re-
established a Nomination Committee comprising all the 
Non-Executive Directors.

The Directors’ service agreements, the terms and conditions 
of appointment of Non-Executive Directors and Directors’ 
deeds of indemnity are available for inspection at the Company’s 
registered office during normal business hours.

The Company’s Articles of Association provide that a Director 
appointed by the Board shall retire and offer themselves 
for re-election at the first AGM following their appointment 
and that, at each AGM of the Company one-third of the 
Directors in addition to any new appointment must retire by 
rotation. Robyn Perriss having been appointed since the 
last AGM, will be subject to election, and Penny Ladkin-Brand 
and Peter Harris will offer themselves for re-election by the 
shareholders at the forthcoming AGM.

With regard to the Directors who are offering themselves 
for re-election at the next AGM, the Board was delighted to 
welcome Robyn Perriss to Next 15 during the year. Robyn 
brings with her extensive experience in the technology and 
media industries which complement the existing skills and 
expertise of the Board. The Board is further satisfied that 
the contributions of both Penny Ladkin-Brand and Peter Harris 
continue to be effective and demonstrate sufficient time 
commitment to their respective roles. The Board believes 
that each Director standing for re-election is independent 
in character and judgement. The Board therefore recommends 
that the Company and its shareholders support the election 
and re-election of each of these Directors.

Richard Eyre CBE stepped down as Chairman of the Board 
on 31 January 2021 and Penny Ladkin-Brand, who had been 
Chair of the Audit Committee and Senior Independent 
Director, became Chair of the Board with effect from that 

28

Governance 
date. Following Penny’s appointment as Chair of the Board, 
Robyn Perriss has been appointed Chair of the Audit Committee. 

Biographical details of each Director standing for election 
and re-election can be found on pages 24 and 25 of this report.

The roles of the Chair and Chief Executive
Richard Eyre CBE held the position of the Chairman of the 
Board until he stepped down from the Board in January 
2021. During the year, he led the Board in the determination 
of its strategy and in achieving its objectives. The Chair is 
responsible for organising the business of the Board, ensuring 
its effectiveness and setting its agenda, and is also responsible 
for effective communication with the Group’s shareholders. 
At the time of his appointment as Chairman, Richard Eyre 
CBE was considered independent as defined by the UK 
Code and in accordance with the principles of the QCA 
Code. Penny Ladkin-Brand was appointed as Chair of the 
Board on 1 February 2021 and is considered to be independent 
as defined by the UK Code and in accordance with the 
principles of the QCA Code.

The Chief Executive Officer, Tim Dyson, oversees the Group 
on a day-to-day basis and is accountable to the Board for 
the financial and operational performance of the Group. The 
Chief Executive Officer has responsibility for implementing 
the agreed strategy and policies of the Board. 

Board performance evaluation, succession planning 
and diversity
The performance of the Board is key to the Company’s 
success. The performance of the Board and its Committees 
is evaluated regularly, and the evaluations are conducted 
with the aim of improving their effectiveness. 

is a specialist board evaluation firm and has no other connection 
with the Company. The process consisted of completion by 
the Board and senior executives of a searching questionnaire 
of the board dynamics, effectiveness and governance, a 
review of the last 12 months of all Board, Committee and 
governance related materials and confidential one-to-one 
interviews of all the board members and senior executives. 
This culminated in a detailed report assessing the board’s 
effectiveness, governance and performance across 20 key 
categories, assessing compliance with the QCA Code and 
the Financial Reporting Council (FRC) Guidance on Board 
Effectiveness (2018), comparison with international best 
practices  and  recommendations  on  driving  sustained 
improvement in the board effectiveness. By way of overview, 
the evaluation concluded that the board is working effectively, 
balancing strong oversight, debate and challenge with the 
independent non-executive directors adding strategic value. 
The evaluation also concluded that there was strong compliance 
with the QCA Code and a deep commitment by the board 
to employee engagement and Environment, Social and 
Governance (ESG).

The principal findings of the independent evaluation and 
recommendations that are endorsed by the Board for 
implementation are to:

•  Enhance the strategic framework at board/executive level 
to incorporate agile approaches in the light of market 
disruption and emerging opportunities.

•  Streamline the individual brand executive reporting at 

board level. 

•  Expand the focus on ESG at board and committee level.

During the year ended 31 January 2021, the Company engaged 
the services of Board Excellence to carry out a detailed and 
independent review of the Board and Board Committee 
processes, procedures and effectiveness. Board Excellence 

The Board believes in the importance of diverse Board 
membership. Our Board has 60% female representation 
which exceeds the recommendation set out by Lord Davies, 
supported by the Hampton-Alexander Review, for a minimum 
of 33% female representation (applicable to FTSE 350 boards) 

by 2020. The Board considers that gender is not the only 
diversity factor and is mindful of a range of other factors 
when assessing the balance of the Board and welcomed a 
finding of Board Excellence that the Board is also diverse 
in terms of thinking styles, age and reflective of the Groups’ 
customer demographics. We set out our Group-wide approach 
to diversity and inclusion in our Corporate Governance 
Statement on page 33. 

In place of having a separate Nomination Committee, during 
the year ended 31 January 2021 the Board as a whole lead 
the Board recruitment and appointment processes. It also 
has responsibility for reviewing the balance of the Board to 
ensure that, collectively, the Board: has a good range of 
skills, knowledge and experience; comprises diverse individuals 
who can bring different perspectives to the Board’s discussions; 
has oversight of senior management and Board succession 
plans; and makes recommendations on matters such as 
Directors’ independence and commitment. 

Directors’ conflicts of interest
Directors have a statutory duty to avoid conflicts of interest 
with the Company. The Company’s Articles of Association 
allow the Directors to authorise conflicts of interest and the 
Board has adopted a policy for managing and, where 
appropriate, approving potential conflicts of interest. The 
Board is aware of the other commitments and interests of 
its Directors, and changes to these commitments and interests 
are reported by the Directors. A review of Directors’ conflicts 
of interest is conducted annually.

29

GovernanceCorporate governance statement continued

Committees of the Board
The Board is supported by the Audit and Remuneration 
Committees. The Board appoints the Committee members. 
The reports of these Committees can be found on pages 
36 to 39 and 40 to 57 respectively.

with by the Board as a whole during the year ended 
31 January 2021. However, from February 2021 the Board 
has  resolved  to  reconstitute  a  Nomination  Committee 
comprised of the three Non-Executive Directors: Penny 
Ladkin-Brand (Chair), Helen Hunter and Robyn Perriss.

Each Committee has access to such external advice as it 
may consider appropriate. The Company Secretary or his 
nominee acts as Secretary to the Committees. The terms 
of reference of each Committee are reviewed regularly, 
updated as necessary to ensure ongoing compliance with 
best practice guidelines and referred to the Board for approval. 
Copies of the Committees’ terms of reference are available 
from the Group’s website at www.next15.com.

The Audit Committee currently comprises three Non-Executive 
Directors: Penny Ladkin-Brand (Chair up to 31 January 2021), 
Robyn Perriss (Chair from 1 February 2021), Richard Eyre 
CBE (up to 31 January 2021) and Helen Hunter. Peter Harris 
also attends most meetings at the invitation of the Chair of 
the  Audit  Committee.  Broadly,  the  Audit  Committee  is 
responsible for reviewing financial reporting, oversight of 
the Internal Audit function, the relationship with the External 
Auditor, internal controls, and oversight of the effectiveness 
of risk and risk management systems.

Risk
Our approach to risk management is set out on page 16, 
and the principal risks to our business, and the actions we 
have taken to mitigate them, are set out on pages 17 to 20.

Corporate culture
We have a strong corporate culture based on entrepreneurial 
spirit, taking personal responsibility and treating all stakeholders 
fairly and equitably. Businesses within the Group are given 
a high degree of autonomy in line with the Group’s emphasis 
on personal responsibility, with the centre acting as enablers 
and teachers. However, the Board and its Committees set 
a high standard for ethical behaviour and ensure the Group 
complies with applicable laws and regulations, and the 
executive team work to embed a corporate conscience that 
runs throughout Group initiatives and practices. 

The Group determines that ethical values and behaviours 
are recognised and respected through:

The Remuneration Committee comprises three Non-Executive 
Directors:  Helen  Hunter  (Chair),  Penny  Ladkin-Brand, 
Robyn Perriss (from 12 November 2020) and Richard Eyre 
CBE (up to 31 January 2021). The Executive Directors also 
attend these Committee meetings at the invitation of the 
Chair of the Remuneration Committee, except when discussing 
matters of their own remuneration. The Remuneration 
Committee is responsible for reviewing and approving 
executive remuneration policies and practices, taking account 
of pay practices and policies across the Group’s workforce.

Nomination matters, such as Board recruitment and the 
appointment process as described on page 28, were dealt 

•  the emphasis on the ‘who’ before the ‘what’ during due 
diligence  when  the  Group  evaluates  acquiring  new 
businesses;

•  presentations by each business to the Board throughout 
the year focusing on all areas of their responsibility including 
people, clients and sustainable growth;

•  quarterly Executive Committee meetings with the CEO 

and senior management; and

•  HR policies and practices, reviews and objective setting, 
and training within each business in the areas they require 
the most development.

Environmental and social impact
Recent global events, such as the Covid-19 pandemic and 
the Black Lives Matter movement have reinforced the necessity 
of environmental and social sustainability to our future 
resilience and prosperity. The Group remains passionate 
about using business as a force for good for our people, 
communities, customers, environment and shareholders. 

Building on our work last year, we are using the internationally 
recognised B Corp framework to focus our strategy on 
people, planet and profit. Using this framework, we have 
begun work on a number of important initiatives including:

Environment
•  We engaged an external partner, Green Element, to measure 
our scope 1&2 emissions for UK Head Office and Savanta, 
see SECR reporting on page 32. We have also begun 
measuring our global scope 1-3 carbon emissions (including 
electricity usage, water usage, waste and travel) with a 
view to setting robust targets.

•  We consolidated office space in the UK and US to reduce 
our environmental footprint, with our people expected to 
work from home more often post-pandemic. We are also 
increasing renewable energy usage in our offices as well 
as implementing more energy-efficient lighting and appliances 
and environmentally friendly waste management.

People
•  We implemented several Diversity, Equity and Inclusion 
(DE&I) initiatives including DE&I audits, a DE&I Council 
and measuring our employee diversity. Further detail is 
provided in the Diversity, Equity and Inclusion section on 
page 33.

•  We  implemented  a  program  called  Next4Me,  which 
helps smooth the transition for those made unavoidably 
redundant and retains their details in our databases for 
future opportunities.

30

Governance•  Scope 3: Business travel in employee owned or hired 
vehicles (there was no reported business travel in employee 
owned or hired vehicles). 

Types of GHG included, as applicable: CO2, NO2, CH4. 
The figures were calculated using DEFRA conversion factors, 
expressed as tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent (tCO2e). 

•  We continuously monitored employee health and wellbeing 
during a year of heightened emotional and physical strain, 
further detail can be found in the employee engagement 
section on page 33.

•  We are rolling out standardised progressive policy sets 

and training. 

•  We are benchmarking brands and setting standards for 

fair remuneration and succession planning.

Customers
•  We established an ethics group to ensure we only work 

with clients aligned with our values.

•  We started tracking revenue from contentious sources 
so that we can hold ourselves to account and disclose 
these revenues separately in future reporting.

•  As part of acquisition due diligence, we have been asking 
all targets about their approach to ESG to ensure we are 
buying values-aligned businesses.

Communities
•  We have repaid all UK government furlough support 

received during the Covid-19 pandemic.

•  We are measuring how local, diverse and compliant with 
laws & regulations our suppliers are. This is with a view 
to setting targets and highlighting any suppliers who are 
not aligned to our social and environmental values with 
a view to replacing them if they fail to make progress.

Governance
•  We are in the process of implementing standardised 
social and environmental non-financial KPIs from Board 
level down.

•  We will continue to increase our ESG disclosure in order 

Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting 2020/21
Next 15 has reported Scope 1 and 2 (and associated Scope 
3) greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions in accordance with the 
requirements of Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting 
(SECR). This includes emissions for the first mandatory reporting 
financial year, the 12 months to 31 January 2021.

Methodology
Responsibilities of Next 15 and Green Element 
Next 15 were responsible for the internal management controls 
governing the data collection process. Green Element was 
responsible for data collection, data aggregation, GHG 
calculations and the emissions statements. Emissions were 
calculated according to the Greenhouse Gas Protocol 
Corporate Greenhouse Gas Accounting and Reporting Standard. 
Data was gathered from exact information where possible, 
with some information based on pro-rata extrapolation where 
verifiable data was not available. 

Scope and Subject Matter 
The report includes sources of environmental impacts under 
the operational control of the Next 15 Group in the UK. This 
includes two UK organisations in 2020:

•  Next 15

•  Savanta

In accordance with the UK Government’s Environmental 
Reporting Guidelines, these companies meet the mandatory 
reporting requirements and others within the Next 15 group 
have not been included. 

GHG sources included in the process:
•  Scope 1: Natural gas for energy generation (there was no 

gas usage in either Next 15 or Savanta offices).

to act as a role model for change.

•  Scope 2: Purchased electricity (location-based method)

31

GovernanceCorporate governance statement continued

Energy Efficiency Action 
During the reporting period, we have focused on ensuring 
our offices are using a low base load of energy during 
periods of low occupation. This has involved installing PIR 
motion sensor lighting and low energy bulbs. In addition, 
we have installed modern efficient appliances in our kitchens 
and programmed laptops to apply standby power when not 
in use. 

Next 15 Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR) 
2020/21 mandatory reporting, as follows: 

Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR) 

UK 2020/21

Total Scope 1+2 emissions  
(market-based method)

Scope 3

Emissions from business travel in rental cars 
or employee vehicles where company is 
responsible for purchasing the fuel

Emissions from upstream transport and 
distribution losses and excavation and 
transport of fuels – location based

Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR) 

UK 2020/21

Total location based tCO2e

Energy consumption used: (kWh)

Intensity Ratios:

Electricity (kWh)

Gas (kWh)

Transport fuel (kWh)

Other energy sources (kWh)

TOTAL

Emissions (tCO2e*)

Scope 1

Emissions from combustion of gas 

Emissions from combustion of fuel 
for transport purposes 

Scope 2

Emissions from purchased electricity – 
location based** 

Emissions from purchased electricity –  
market based

Scope 1 & 2

Total Scope 1+2 emissions  
(location-based method)

32

99,545.9

—

—

—

Number of full-time employees within 
financial year (FTE)

Intensity ratio: tCO2e from Scope 1, 2 and 3 
(fuel for business travel only) / FTE  
(Location Based)

99,545.9

Methodology

Certification

GHG Protocol Corporate Accounting 
and Reporting Standard

Calculated as accurate by Green 
Element Limited and Compare Your 
Footprint Limited, UK

* 

tCO2e is tonnes of carbon dioxide equivalent gases.

**   Location-based electricity (Scope 2) emissions using the average grid fuel 
mix in the region or country where the electricity was purchased and consumed. 
For SECR, location based is mandatory. 

—

—

23.2

—

23.2

—

—

5.5

28.7

302

0.09

Our shareholders
The Board recognises the importance of maintaining an 
effective dialogue with its shareholders, to ensure that its 
strategy  and  performance  are  clearly  understood.  We 
communicate with our shareholders through our annual 
report  and  accounts,  full-year  and  half-year  results 
announcements, trading updates, AGMs and face-to-face 
meetings. A range of corporate information is available from 
the Group’s website at www.next15.com (including copies 
of presentations, announcements, historical annual reports, 
historical notices of general meetings, AGM voting records, 
and other governance-related materials).

In early 2021, we engaged directly with our institutional 
shareholders on changes to the remuneration packages for 
both Executive and Non-Executive Directors, to better align 
the packages to market levels and Next 15’s longer-term 
strategy. Further details of these changes are set out in the 
Remuneration Report from page 40. 

Ordinarily the Board would be available to take questions 
from shareholders at the AGM. In accordance with current 
UK government measures, shareholders may not be able 
to attend the AGM in person. If the restrictions on public 
gatherings remain in place and shareholders are unable to 
attend the AGM, in order to ensure that shareholders have 
adequate access to the Board, we will ensure that the Board 
is able to meet shareholders and respond to their questions 
by way of an interactive webcast. Details of this and any 
other changes to the AGM arrangements will be published 
on the Group’s website. We strongly encourage all shareholders 
to vote on all resolutions by completing an online proxy 
appointment form in advance of the meeting, appointing 
the chair of the meeting as your proxy. Proxy votes will be 
counted at the meeting for each shareholder resolution and 
are subsequently published on the Group’s website at 
www.next15.com. In the event of a significant proportion of 
votes ever being received against a particular resolution, 
the Board would take steps to understand shareholder 
concerns and consider what action they might want to take 

Governancein response. Shareholders are also encouraged to submit 
questions to the Board throughout the year via the Company 
Secretary to cosec@next15.com. More information concerning 
the arrangements for the AGM can be found on page 59.

The Board is happy to enter into dialogue with institutional 
shareholders based on a mutual understanding of objectives, 
subject to its duties regarding equal treatment of shareholders 
and the dissemination of inside information. The Chief Executive 
Officer and the Chief Financial Officer meet institutional 
shareholders on a regular basis.

The Board as a whole is kept informed of the views and 
concerns of the major shareholders. When requested to do 
so, the Non-Executive Directors will attend meetings with 
major shareholders and are prepared to contact individual 
shareholders should any specific area of concern or enquiry 
be raised. 

Our people
We talk about the “who” and not the “what”. We talk about 
our people being our greatest asset. Today, we are not only 
competing for great talent, but we’re also competing to 
stand out in the market as a great place to work. Our goal 
is to create a work environment where all our people can 
bring their whole selves to work every day. Where inclusivity 
is a behaviour; a mindset that runs through the group. 

2020 was a year that saw society unite and divide, to fight 
a common enemy, start movements, and force action across 
the globe. The world of work has changed because of the 
events of 2020 and that compelled us to not only reflect 
on our practices as employers and as corporate citizens, 
but to interrogate our thinking. It highlighted the need for 
us as an organisation to focus and take action to embed 
change across the business. By making these key changes, 
we take the first step to changing the societies we operate in. 

Diversity, equity and inclusion
We recognise that we have fundamental changes to make 
within the business, however this journey started many years 
ago when we set out to ensure our board was gender 
balanced. We currently have a majority female board including 
a female Chair. Taking the events of 2020 into consideration 
we have embarked on the next stage of our journey where 
we have started to work more holistically as a group, to 
create new frameworks that underpin all our businesses 
and embed the changes we need to make.

During the year we took the decision to audit our current 
state as a starting point. We engaged with an external partner, 
Bold Culture, to conduct Diversity, Equity and Inclusion audits 
on all of our brands which will be completed by the end of 
May 2021. We intend to use the data to develop a more 
informed strategy tailored to the needs of the organisation 
and our people. This strategy will be kept under continuous 
review by way of direct engagement with our employees, 
and leverage feedback to create a work environment, including 
benefits and policies, that aligns with our culture and best 
practice.

We built a cross brand affinity group to collaborate, share 
best practice and help each other improve. We also formed 
a DE&I Council in August 2020 comprised of 20 people 
from across the brands representing all levels of business 
and industry experience, and provides diversity of thought, 
race, ethnicity, gender, sexual orientation and disability. The 
DE&I Council will act as our internal indicator of change, 
reporting on activity and measuring the adoption of new 
processes and programs.

M Booth appointed Eric Winkfield as Head of DE&I, the first 
appointment of its kind for the Group. In addition to his 
responsibilities at M Booth, Eric works with Next 15 to help 
with Group and Brand guidance on inclusion, and consults 
with clients on diversity, equity and inclusion. Inclusive hiring 
training has been carried out at the Next 15 level and is 
being conducted within the Brands as they complete their 

audits. In the coming months, a group strategy to embed 
inclusivity across the Group will be created as the full set of 
audit data becomes available.

We have taken significant steps to understand the Group 
by utilising new software that provides us with understandable 
analysis of our own data. We have taken the opportunity to 
look at our diversity at a Group level, the aggregate data is 
shown in the charts on page 34. This data is now used to 
populate the “People Dashboard” which is kept up to date 
in real time and reviewed by the Board at every meeting. This 
data also allows us to create stronger strategic people plans 
and highlight areas of risk as well as develop benchmarks 
for best practice. 

Employee engagement
Our employees are key to the Group’s success and we rely 
on a committed workforce to help us achieve our short-term 
and long-term objectives. It is right that our employees share 
in the success of Next 15. Accordingly, a number of incentive 
arrangements operate across the Group to reward colleagues 
for the contribution they are making, as a result of their 
efforts to grow the business, towards generating the rewards 
which our investors enjoy. We are always reviewing our 
incentives to ensure that they drive the right behaviours 
within our businesses. In addition, the Group regularly keeps 
employees apprised of the Group’s financial performance, 
through  a  combination  of  meetings  and  collaborative 
communication.

Knowing what our people think and feel is key to our growth 
as a Group. Our businesses monitor engagement and act 
on feedback in a variety of different ways, including yearly 
engagement surveys, pulse surveys, 360-degree appraisals 
and central reporting of HR issues. We have worked to 
centralise data and reporting so we can correlate people 
trends with other business metrics. These trends and issues 
are reported to our Chief Executive Officer at quarterly 
Executive Committee meetings of senior management.

33

GovernanceOur customers
Client focus is critical to the success of each of our businesses. 
By their nature our businesses work in collaboration with 
their clients: we embed teams within client organisations, 
use agile processes, and build businesses to better serve 
client needs based on what they tell us.

Our suppliers
Because of the nature of our business, our long-term success 
as a Group is not dependent on any one supplier; nevertheless, 
we believe in treating our suppliers fairly, for example by 
ensuring that we pay our suppliers promptly in accordance 
with the prevailing terms of business.

The Group has a zero-tolerance approach to practices which 
are at odds with our values and culture, for example corruption, 
bribery and modern slavery. We are committed to acting 
ethically and with integrity in all business dealings and 
relationships and to implementing and enforcing effective 
systems and controls to ensure such practices are not taking 
place anywhere in our businesses or supply chain.

 White/Caucasian 50.71% 
 Asian –any other Asian background 14.61%
 Do not wish to comment 13.95%
 Asian –Indian 6.22% 
 Two or more races/mixed race 3.11% 
 White/British 2.64%
 LatinX 1.98% 
 Black –Caribbean <1% 
 Arab –Middle Eastern <1% 
 Asian – Pakistani <1% 
 Mixed/multiple ethic groups <1% 
 White (Other) <1% 
 Arab – North African <1% 
 Pacific Islander <1% 
 Native Hawaiian <1% 

 Female 57.21% 
 Male 41.52%
 Prefer not to classify 1.27%

Corporate governance statement continued

VEEO Classification
50+
5757+
9595+

Active employee 
by contract type 

 Full-time 95.28%
 Part-time 4.72%

Gender breakdown 

34

Governance15
+
14
+
6
+
3
+
2
+
2
+
1
+
1
+
1
+
1
+
1
+
1
+
1
+
1
+
+
41
41
+
+
2
2
+
+
S
+
5
5
+
+
S
Financial reporting and going concern statement
The Directors have, at the time of approving the financial 
statements, a reasonable expectation that the Company 
and the Group have adequate resources to continue in 
operational existence for the foreseeable future. Accordingly, 
they continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing 
the financial statements. 

The Directors have made this assessment in light of reviewing 
the Group’s budget and cash requirements for a period in 
excess of one year from the date of signing of the annual 
report and considered outline plans for the Group thereafter. 

The Group’s business activities, together with the factors 
likely to affect its future development, performance and 
position, are set out in the Strategic Report on pages 1 to 
23. The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity 
position and borrowing facilities are described in the Financial 
Review on pages 10 to 15. 

In addition, note 19 to the financial statements includes: the 
Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its 
capital; its financial risk management objectives; details of 
its financial instruments and hedging activities; and its exposures 
to credit risk and liquidity risk. 

The Directors’ Responsibilities Statement in respect of the 
financial statements is set out on page 61.

35

GovernanceAudit Committee report

Robyn Perriss
Chair

“ The Committee plays a vital role 
in helping the Board to fulfil its 
oversight obligation.”

36

I am pleased to present my first report as Chair of the Audit 
Committee (the ‘Committee’) following my appointment as 
Committee Chair on 1 February 2021. I would like to thank 
Penny Ladkin-Brand, who served as Committee Chair until 
that date.

the agility and entrepreneurial spirit of the Group companies. 
This has been a key focus for the year together with regular 
monitoring of the impact of Covid-19 on our business. You 
will find important detail on this in other sections of the 
Annual Report.

I had a detailed induction to the Next 15 Group following my 
appointment as a Non-Executive Director in November 2020 
with additional emphasis and tailoring in relation to my 
responsibilities as Chair of the Committee. My induction 
included:

•  meetings with the CFO and the Group’s finance team;

•  meetings with Deloitte LLP, our External Auditors and with 

the Group’s Internal Audit function;

•  a meeting with Numis Securities Ltd, the Group’s corporate 
broker to get a capital markets perspective of the Group;

•  a review of the key reporting and areas of significant 

judgement in the prior financial year; and

•  a review of the minutes, reports and papers submitted to 

the Committee in the 2020 financial year.

This was very helpful in getting quickly up to speed with 
key financial reporting and control matters and I’d like to 
thank all of those who provided assistance during my induction.

The Committee plays a vital role in helping the Board to fulfil 
its oversight obligation by monitoring and reviewing the 
financial reporting process, ensuring the integrity of the 
financial information provided to our shareholders, overseeing 
the development and maintenance of the Group’s risk 
management and internal control environment. It is important 
that we as a Committee continue to independently assess 
how the internal control environment and relevant processes 
and systems ensure that the Next 15 Group is effective, 
robust and sustainable for the long term whilst also maintaining 

I will be happy to answer any questions about the work of 
the Committee at the forthcoming AGM. 

Robyn Perriss
Audit Committee Chair
12 April 2021

Membership and Attendance
The current members of the Committee are the Chair of the 
Committee and two Non-Executive Directors, all of whom 
are independent. The membership of the Committee has 
been selected with the aim of providing a range of financial 
and commercial expertise necessary to meet its responsibilities 
under the QCA Code. The Committee Chair and Penny 
Ladkin-Brand have both recently stepped down as Chief 
Financial Officers of premium listed FTSE businesses and 
both are qualified accountants and thus the Board considers 
their financial experience to be recent and relevant to discharge 
their duty to the Committee and its stakeholders.

The Company Secretary, or his nominee, attends all meetings 
as Secretary to the Committee and, by invitation, they are 
attended by the Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial 
Officer, the External Audit Partner and the Head of Internal 
Audit. From time-to-time other senior managers are invited 
to present on the executive team’s behalf.

Governance 
 
 
The Committee met six times during the year, with three 
extra meetings to consider and monitor the impact of Covid-19. 
In prior years, the Committee met at least three times a year. 
Following a review of the Committee’s workload and duties 
and taking into account feedback from the recent Board 
evaluation, it was agreed that one additional meeting would 
be added to the calendar to ensure the Committee meets 
at least every quarter going forward. A summary of members 
attendance can be found on page 28.

Role and Responsibilities
The Committee’s role is to assist the Board in fulfilling its 
oversight responsibilities. The Committee monitors and 
reviews the integrity of the Group’s financial reporting and 
other announcements relating to its financial reporting and 
manages the relationships between the Company and its 
Internal and External Audit functions. The Committee makes 
recommendations to the Board based on its activities, all of 
which were accepted during the year. The Committee’s 
responsibilities are set out in its Terms of Reference on the 
Company’s website at www.next15.com. 

Risk and Internal control
The Company’s system of internal control, along with its 
design and operating effectiveness, is subject to review by 
the Committee. The Board has overall responsibility for 
setting the Group’s risk appetite and ensuring that there is 
an effective risk management framework. The Committee 
supports the Board and the Internal Auditor in reviewing 
systems of risk management and the effectiveness of internal 
controls. The Chief Executive Officer has overall accountability 
for the control and management of the risks the Company 
faces. More information on how we manage our risk can be 
found on page 16.

Key activities during the year

Key area

Activity during the year

Financial 
reporting

•  Considered the Group’s accounting policies and practices, application of accounting standards and significant 
judgements and estimates, adjusting items, tax matters, goodwill impairment, earn-out liabilities, and accounting 
for new acquisitions.

•  Reviewed the Annual Report and Accounts as a whole including the clarity of the disclosures and that the narrative 

in the front section reflected the performance as detailed in the Group financial statements.

•  Reviewed the Going Concern Statement included in the Annual Report; in assessing going concern the Committee 
has considered the Group’s latest budget and three-year plan, cash-flow forecast and corresponding sensitivities 
together with potential downside scenarios.

•  Reviewed the half-year accounts, including the material judgements and estimates.

•  Reviewed the External Auditor’s report on the full-year audit. 

•  Reviewed the half-year and full-year results announcements and trading statements.

The significant financial judgements considered in relation to the Annual Report and Accounts are detailed on page 39.

Internal  
Audit

•  Approved the annual Internal Audit plan, including its alignment to the principal risks, emerging areas of risk, 

coverage across the Group and continuing review of the Group’s processes and controls. 

•  Monitoring the remit and resourcing of the Group’s Internal Audit function.

•  Assisting  the  Board  in  its  assessment  of  the  Group’s  risk  environment,  internal  controls  and  risk  

management processes.

•  Keeping under review the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control and risk management systems.

•  Reviewed key findings from Internal Audit activities during the year.

•  Reviewed the External Auditor’s independence, objectivity, and the effectiveness of the external audit process.

•  Considered the re-appointment of the External Auditor.

•  Considered External Auditor fees and terms of engagement.

•  Reviewed and approved changes to the Non-Audit Services Policy.

•  Reviewed the External Auditor non-audit services and fees.

•  Discussed the impact of upcoming changes to accounting standards and legal, tax and regulatory 

requirements.

•  Carried out a review of the Committee’s terms of reference.

External  
audit

Other  
matters

37

GovernanceAudit Committee report continued

Areas of focus for the coming year 
The Committee intends to continue to focus on strengthening 
the systems of internal control through a number of initiatives 
such as supporting management in continuing to improve 
the Group’s information security controls and embedding 
continuous controls monitoring. In light of the Covid-19 
pandemic and the fundamental changes to how our people 
work, we will continue to be alert to the risk of fraud and 
ensuring that people are working safely remotely and that 
our data is protected. A key area of focus for the Committee 
over the coming year will include our Group cyber posture 
and a review of our GDPR compliance across key brands. 
The  Committee  has  recently  launched  a  governance 
improvement project to include a review of the quality of 
reporting  from  the  Group  into  the  Committee  and  the 
Committee’s terms of reference have been recently refreshed. 
Over the coming year the Committee also plans to review 
the operation of both the whistleblowing policy and anti-
bribery and corruption procedures.

Internal Audit
The Group has an independent and objective internal audit 
function which supports the Board in assessing and ensuring 
that risks are appropriately managed in line with the Board’s 
risk appetite, and that the internal controls are operating 
effectively. Internal audit achieves this by assessing whether 
all significant risks are identified and appropriately reported 
to the Board, assessing whether they are adequately controlled 
and assisting management to improve the effectiveness of 
governance, risk management and internal controls. 

Internal audit focuses on controls and related activities 
(including policies, procedures and systems) which are in 
place to ensure: 

•  Proper identification and management of risk;

•  Reliability and integrity of information;

•  Compliance  with  policies,  plans,  procedures,  laws 

and regulations;

•  Safeguarding of assets;

•  Economical and efficient use of resources; and

•  Accomplishment of established objectives and goals.

Internal audit may perform consulting and advisory services 
relating to governance, risk management and control as 
appropriate for Next 15. It may also evaluate within the 
independence requirements, specific operations at the 
request of the Board, Audit Committee, or management as 
appropriate. To provide for the independence of the function, 
the function is run by the Head of Internal Audit, who reports 
administratively to the Chief Operations Officer of the Group 
and functionally to the Audit Committee. The Audit Committee 
provides final approval of the department’s Charter and 
annual internal audit plan. The Head of Internal Audit is 
responsible for providing the Audit Committee with a self-
assessment on internal audit activity, its consistency with 
the Audit Charter and performance relative to its plan at 
least every two years.

The Internal Audit Plan for FY22 was approved by the 
Committee in December 2020 with areas of focus over the 
coming year including:

•  End user IT asset management and bring your own device 
controls. This is particularly relevant in light of Next 15 
employees working remotely from home since late March 
as a result of Covid-19; 

•  An update on the implementation of GDPR across the Group;

•  Financial controls and health check reviews with a particular 

focus on recent acquisitions; and

•  Development of a continuous controls monitoring dashboard 
which provides a centralised view of the control environment 
of Next 15 brands and facilitates investigation by exception, 
together with benchmarking and sharing of best practice.

Auditor independence, objectivity and fees
The External Auditor, Deloitte LLP, was first appointed in 
2014, for the financial year ended 31 January 2015. The 
Board is satisfied that the Company/Group has adequate 
policies and safeguards in place to ensure that Deloitte 
maintain their objectivity and independence. The External 
Auditor reports annually on its independence from the 
Company/Group and in accordance with Deloitte’s partner 
rotation rules, a new senior audit partner, Peter McDermott, 
was appointed with effect from 1 February 2020. 

The Group has a formal policy on the engagement of the 
External Auditor for non-audit services. The objective of the 
policy is to ensure that the provision of non-audit services 
by the External Auditor does not impair, or is not perceived 
to impair, the External Auditor’s independence or objectivity. 
The policy sets out monetary limits and imposes guidance 
on the areas of work that the External Auditor may be asked 
to undertake and those assignments where the External 
Auditor should not be involved. The policy is reviewed 
regularly, and its application is monitored by the Committee. 
The fees paid to Deloitte in respect of non-audit services 
are shown in note 4 to the financial statements. This work 
is not considered to affect the independence or objectivity 
of the External Auditor. The non-audit services policy was 
updated in the year to comply with the FRC Revised Ethical 
Standards for periods commencing on or after 15 March 2020. 
The Audit Committee has confirmed no services were provided 
outside of the updated policy. 

External audit effectiveness
The Committee places great importance on ensuring that the 
external audit is a high quality and effective. The Committee 
met with Deloitte throughout the year including at times 
without management present, to discuss their remit and any 
issues arising from their work as auditor The Committee 
plans to evaluate the effectiveness of the audit process 
more formally this year using a questionnaire, together with 
input from management at the end of the audit cycle. 

38

GovernanceIn relation to the 2021 financial year, the Committee was satisfied that there had been appropriate focus and challenge on the primary areas of audit risk and concluded that Deloitte 
remained independent and objective in relation to audit. The Committee has made a recommendation to the Board to re-appoint Deloitte LLP as the Company’s auditor for the 2021/22 
financial year. Accordingly, a resolution proposing their re-appointment will be proposed at the AGM in June 2021.
Significant Judgements

Issue

Explanation

How it was addressed

Accounting for acquisitions Under IFRS 3 the Group must identify and value the intangibles it has acquired. 
The identification of the intangibles acquired, such as customer relationships, 
brand names or intellectual property, requires judgement following an assessment 
of the acquired business. Furthermore, it relies on forecasting future performance 
of the business which, depending on the size of the acquiree, could be 
materially sensitive to changes in growth rate or profitability assumptions.

During the year the material acquisitions for the Group were CRE and Mach49. The 
Committee considered the proposed acquisition accounting for both businesses 
from management, which included the valuation of the acquired intangibles. Due to 
the nature of Mach49, the assumptions used for revenue growth rate and profitability 
were particularly sensitive in calculating the contingent consideration. The Committee 
discussed the sensitivity of those assumptions, and the basis of the assumptions 
used as well. At the year-end, the External Auditor’s work was also discussed. The 
Committee concluded that the assumptions used were appropriate. 

Changes in estimates relating 
to acquisition-related liabilities

The Group has material earn-out liabilities, with some payments dependent 
on performance in up to four years from the 31 January 2021. The estimates 
are sensitive to changes in revenue growth rates and profitability assumptions, 
as well as the discount rate used. If incorrect assumptions are used this could 
result in a material adjustment to the value of the liabilities within future 
financial years. 

The Committee considered the earn-out liabilities recognised at the half-year and 
year-end split by brand, how they had changed over the last 6 or 12 months, and 
the key assumptions made. Further detail was discussed for the most sensitive 
liabilities alongside management’s rationale for those assumptions and relevant 
sensitivity analysis. 

Presentation of Alternative 
Performance Measures

The identification of adjusting items and the presentation of Alternative 
Performance Measures (“APMs”) is a judgement in terms of which costs or 
credits are not associated with the underlying trading of the Group or otherwise 
impact the comparability of the Group’s results year on year. The Group’s 
adjusting items include the amortisation of acquired intangibles, the change 
in estimate and unwinding of discount on acquisition-related liabilities, deal 
costs, growth share charges, employment-related acquisition costs, property 
related impairment, and Covid-19 related restructuring costs.

At the year-end the External Auditor’s testing thereof was also discussed and following 
due consideration the Committee concluded it was satisfied with management’s 
assumptions and judgements. 

For both the half-year and full year results the Committee considered the adjusting 
items, including explanations of why they were either not related to the performance 
of the business or impacted the comparability of the Group’s results year-on-year. 
The Committee also reviewed the FRC’s guidance, considered adjusting items used 
by the Group’s peers and the External Auditor’s assessment of the adjusting items. 
The Committee reviewed the narrative for the adjusting items within the Annual Report 
to ensure it gave adequate detail on why the items were adjusted. The Committee 
concluded it was satisfied with the adjusting items included in the Group’s results and 
that appropriate disclosure of those items has been included in the Annual Report.

39

GovernanceDirectors’ remuneration report

Helen Hunter
Remuneration Committee Chair

“ The Committee keeps the 
remuneration framework under 
consistent review and is 
committed to ensuring it is 
consistent with best practice.”

40

On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report for the year ended 31 January 2021. 
The report explains the work of the Remuneration Committee 
(the ‘Committee’) during the year, the basis for the remuneration 
paid to Directors for FY21, and how we intend to apply the 
remuneration framework for FY22. 

Steps taken to adjust our remuneration approach in light 
of the Covid-19 pandemic
I am presenting this report to you following a year of unprecedented 
market uncertainty and volatility, driven by the Covid-19 
pandemic. The Directors recognised the need to exercise 
restraint early in 2020 to ensure that the Company’s cash 
position was maximised, and that executive pay was aligned 
with the experience of its employees and shareholders. 
Recognising the need to furlough some of our staff and to 
suspend our dividend the Executive and Non-Executive 
Directors took a pre-emptive 20% pay cut, effective 1 April 2020, 
which was reviewed by the Committee and the full salary 
was re-instated in October 2020. The Executive Directors 
also waived their entitlement to the FY21 bonus scheme. 

We delayed the FY21 long-term incentive award grants until 
the impact of Covid-19 was clear and meaningful targets 
could be set. Following adequate assessment of the Company’s 
position, stretching targets were set and are detailed in 
this report. 

Remuneration review
The Committee keeps the remuneration framework under 
consistent review and is committed to ensuring it is consistent 
with best practice and adequately reflects Next 15’s position 
and performance against the current macro-economic 
backdrop. Having focused on the structure of our remuneration 
framework last year, which resulted in a significant change 
to the LTIP structure, the Committee has now reviewed the 

overall remuneration levels and structure more broadly 
throughout the senior executive population. Following this 
review and in light of the Group’s ambitious growth plans, 
the Committee believes it is appropriate to increase the LTIP 
award levels from 100% to 150% of salary for both Executive 
Directors. Next 15 has bold growth plans for the next 5-year 
period and the Committee believes that a greater focus on 
the LTIP will provide a better alignment to this strategy. 
Furthermore, in determining this proposed increase, the 
Committee reviewed the Executive Directors’ total remuneration 
levels against the market. The increase to the LTIP will provide 
a more appropriate weighting to the package between 
salary and performance related elements for the CEO and 
will ensure that the CFO’s package is not too far below the 
mid-market level. A two-year post vest holding period will 
also be introduced for awards granted from FY22 onwards 
to increase the performance time-horizon and to bring this 
aspect of the framework into line with best practice. The 
increase to LTIP award levels will require an increase to the 
individual limit within the LTIP rules, which will be subject to 
a shareholder vote to amend the LTIP rules, at the 2021 AGM. 

The Non-Executive Directors’ fees were also reviewed during 
the year. These have remained unchanged for six years and 
the review indicated that the base fee levels should increase, 
recognising the growth and development of the business 
over this time and the need to recruit and retain high quality 
talent to support the next stage of the Company’s growth. 
The Non-Executive Director base fee will therefore increase 
from £40,000 to £53,000. The fee for chairing a committee 
will be £7,000. The increase in fees combined with a desire 
to have the ability to expand the number of non-executive 
directors as the Group continues to grow, will also require 
a change to be made to the Articles of Association to increase 
the cap on aggregate fees payable to directors, and the 
approval of new Articles of Association will be subject to a 
separate vote at the 2021 AGM.

GovernanceI hope this report is clear and demonstrates the robust 
application of our remuneration framework to ensure pay 
for performance at Next 15. Although we are an AIM listed 
company with no requirement for a shareholder vote on 
Directors’ pay, in the spirit of full accountability, this Remuneration 
Report will be subject to an advisory shareholder vote at 
the 2021 AGM. 

We look forward to continued dialogue with you, and your 
support at the forthcoming AGM.

Helen Hunter
Remuneration Committee Chair
12 April 2021

We are committed to having an open and constructive dialogue 
with investors and as such the proposals set out above were 
sent to our major investors for their feedback. The Committee 
was pleased that the overall the response was positive and 
investors were supportive. 

Performance and pay for FY21
Notwithstanding the very challenging operating environment, 
it has been another year of good progress for the Group 
with adjusted diluted EPS and adjusted profit before income 
tax both increasing by 17% and 22% respectively. 

The annual bonus was based on the achievement of adjusted 
operating profit, cash conversion, organic revenue and 
adjusted operating profit margin performance conditions. 
The formulaic outcome under the bonus would have resulted 
in a bonus pay-out of 100% of maximum. However, the 
Executive Directors made a decision early in the year to 
forgo any bonus, in light of the need to retain cash and 
spread the available bonus pool more broadly throughout 
the business.

We have several cycles of legacy LTIP awards that were 
due to vest based on performance over FY21 and tranche 
four of the FY18 LTIP, tranche three of the FY19 LTIP award 
and tranche two of the FY20 LTIP award are all eligible to 
vest in FY22. The awards are based 70% on an adjusted 
EPS performance metric and 30% on strategic KPIs. Following 
an assessment of performance over the year, the tranches 
will vest as follows:

•  100% of tranche four of FY18 LTIP;

•  100% tranche three of FY19 LTIP; and

•  82.5% of tranche two of FY20 LTIP. 

Further details on the performance against targets for both 
the bonus and LTIP can be found later in this report.

Grant of the FY21 LTIP awards
The grant of the FY21 LTIP awards was delayed until there 
was better visibility for longer term business performance. 
These annual awards are usually granted in April of each 
year but given the uncertainty from the Covid-19 pandemic 
these were deferred and eventually granted on 30 July 2020. 
The three-year performance and vesting approach approved 
at the June 2020 AGM was adopted for these awards and 
in line with the current remuneration framework. For the 
70% based on EPS, growth of between 10% and 20% over 
the three-year performance period is required for threshold 
and maximum vesting. 15% of the award is based on average 
annual organic net revenue growth and vesting requires 
between 0% and 5% average annual growth over the three-
year performance period – this recognises that FY20 was 
a relatively high base line to measure this growth (pre impact 
of the pandemic on the business in FY21). The remaining 
15% is based on operating profit margin and requires the 
average annual margin over the performance period to be 
between 16%-18% for threshold to maximum vesting. The 
award levels were 100% of salary. 

Closing remarks
The Committee is satisfied that the remuneration framework 
has been applied prudently, with stretching performance 
conditions applied and a significant reduction in pay to align 
with the experience of our stakeholders. We will continue 
to apply the framework robustly to ensure that there is a 
strong link between reward and performance.

41

GovernanceDirectors’ remuneration report continued

At a glance

How we performed in FY21
FY21 performance-related bonus
Adjusted performance measure

Target range Performance

Operating profit after  
lease liability interest*

£38m–£41m

£47.9m

Organic revenue decline

(10.5)%–(4)%

(3.4)%

Cash conversion ratio

90–100%

111%

Operating profit margin

15%–15.6%

18.5%

Total

*  Excluding acquisitions made after Q1 reforecast in May 2020. 

Maximum vs actual pay for FY21

Weighting

Outcome

25%

25%

25%

25%

25%

25%

25%

25%

100%

100%

£1,800k

£1,600k

£1,400k

£1.200k

£1,000k

£800k

£600k

£400k

£200k

£0k

£1,655k

24%

26%

50%

£1,190k

36%

64%

  Fixed pay 
  Performance-related bonus 
  LTIP

£736k

26%

26%

48%

£523k

39%

61%

Maximum

Actual FY21

Maximum

Actual FY21

Chief Executive Officer

Chief Financial Officer

LTIP tranches vesting in relation to FY21 performance
Tranche four of the FY18 LTIP award, tranche three of the FY19 LTIP award and tranche two of the FY20 LTIP award are eligible to vest in FY22, based on performance 
over FY21. 

The awards are based 70% on an adjusted EPS performance metric and 30% on strategic KPIs. The awards have different performance criteria; performance against 
targets and the vesting outcomes are shown below:

FY18 and FY19 LTIP Awards

Adjusted performance measure

Earnings per share

KPIs
Organic revenue growth/(decline)

Operating profit margin

Total

42

Weighting

Target range

Performance

70%

5% – 15%

17%

(9)% – (7)%

15% – 17%

(3.4)%

18.5%

15%

15%

100%

FY18
tranche 4
vesting

70%

15%

15%

FY19
tranche 3
vesting

70%

15%

15%

100%

100%

GovernanceFY20 LTIP Awards
The performance criteria for the FY20 LTIP award were set at the date of the award for FY20 and FY21.

Adjusted performance measure

Earnings per share

KPIs

Organic revenue growth/(decline)

Operating profit margin

Total

How we will apply our remuneration framework for FY22

Time horizon

Element

Salary

FY22

FY23

FY24 Application of remuneration framework for FY22

Tim Dyson, Chief Executive: $906,206.

Peter Harris, Chief Financial Officer: £330,000. 

Weighting

Target range

Performance

70%

5% – 15%

17%

3% – 6%

16% – 19%

(3.4)%

18.5%

15%

15%

100%

FY20
tranche 2
vesting

70%

0%

12.5%

82.5%

Pension and 
benefits

Annual bonus

Long-term 
incentives

Shareholding 
requirement

Salary levels reflect no salary increase for the CEO and a 2.1% increase for the CFO, in line with / less than, the average workforce increase. 

Directors are entitled to receive employer contributions of up to 10% of base salary to a Group pension plan.

Maximum opportunity is 60% of salary, payable in cash.

Performance metrics unchanged from FY21 of operating profit, organic revenue growth, cash conversion ratio and operating 
profit margin.

Long-term incentive grant of 150% of salary.

Performance will be measured over a single three-year period and will be based two thirds on EPS, 16.7% on revenue and 16.7% on margin.

A two-year holding period will apply to the vested award. 

Executive Directors must build and maintain a holding of shares in the Company of 200% of salary. 50% of the net of tax number 
shares vesting under the incentive arrangements must be retained until guideline is met.

43

GovernanceDirectors’ remuneration report continued

Remuneration framework
To ensure that the Group continues to grow, organically and inorganically, we must have the right remuneration framework in place.

In setting our remuneration framework the Committee considers:

•  ensuring that there is a strong long-term alignment of interest between Executive Directors and our shareholders; 

•  the need to align the overall reward arrangements with the Group’s strategy, both in the short and long term;

•  the need to attract, retain and motivate Executive Directors and senior management of the right calibre, ensuring an appropriate mix between fixed and variable pay; and

•  ensuring that there are coherent cascade pay and benefits arrangements elsewhere in the Group to support internal alignment of interest and succession.

Executive Director remuneration framework

Key features

Purpose and link to strategy

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

Malus and clawback

Reflects external market and 
geography and an individual’s 
performance and contribution.

Reviewed annually, normally 
in February.

Attracts and retains the best 
talent with the necessary 
expertise to deliver the Group’s 
strategy and to create 
shareholder value.

The Committee considers the 
individual’s performance and 
contribution in the period since 
the last review.

N/A

No prescribed maximum.

Account will be taken of 
increases applied to employees 
as a whole when determining 
salary increases.

Committee discretion to award 
increases when it considers it 
appropriate, including where 
base salary at outset may have 
been set at a relatively low level, 
or where there has been a 
substantial change in 
responsibilities of the role.

Element of 
remuneration

Base salary

44

GovernanceElement of 
remuneration

Allowances and 
benefits

Pension

Key features

Purpose and link to strategy

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

Malus and clawback

The Chief Executive Officer is 
entitled to a contribution to a 
deferred benefit plan; private 
health, dental and vision 
insurance; life assurance; 
professional adviser fees paid 
on his behalf; and car allowance 
(lease and associated fees) 
or cash in lieu thereof.

The Chief Financial Officer 
is entitled to private 
medical insurance.

The Committee may determine 
that other benefits may be added 
where appropriate.

Directors are entitled to receive 
employer contributions to a 
Group pension plan.

Provides market competitive and 
cost-effective benefits.

Provides reassurance and risk 
mitigation and supports personal 
health and wellbeing.

The value of benefits is not 
capped as it is determined by 
the cost to the Company, which 
may vary.

N/A

N/A

Provides market equivalent 
retirement benefits.

Maximum contribution, currently 
10% of base salary.

N/A

N/A

Performance-
related Bonus

Annual cash bonus plan. Targets 
closely aligned with the Group’s 
strategic aims.

Reinforces and rewards delivery of 
annual performance and strategic 
business priorities.

Targets are reviewed annually by 
the Committee.

Delivers value to shareholders and 
consistent with the delivery of the 
strategic plan.

Not pensionable.

In addition, Tim Dyson is entitled 
to receive a pension benefit 
under a US 401k plan.

The maximum bonus opportunity 
is 60% of salary.

The Committee chooses 
measures that help drive and 
reward the achievement of the 
Group’s strategy. Metrics and 
their relative weightings are 
reviewed each year. 

The Remuneration Committee 
has the discretion to adjust and 
to override formulaic outcomes 
for annual bonus payment due if 
the Remuneration Committee 
considers it is not reflective of 
the underlying performance of 
the Company, as well investor 
experience and the employee 
reward outcome.

The bonus is subject to recovery 
and withholding provisions which 
may be applied in the event of a 
material miscalculation of a 
participant’s entitlement, a material 
misstatement or restatement of the 
Company’s financial results for the 
year to which the performance 
period relates, or material personal 
misconduct that would justify 
summary dismissal, or result in 
significant reputational damage to 
the Company, or have a material 
adverse effect on the Company’s 
financial position, or reflect a 
significant failure of the Company’s 
risk management or control.

45

GovernanceDirectors’ remuneration report continued

Remuneration framework continued

Executive Director remuneration framework continued

Element of 
remuneration

Key features

Purpose and link to strategy

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

Malus and clawback

Long-Term 
Incentive Plan 
(‘LTIP’)

Awards may be structured as 
performance share awards or 
nil-cost options. 

Rewards long-term sustainable 
performance, in line with the 
Company’s strategy.

150% of salary.

For awards granted during FY21 
onwards, awards will be subject 
to a 3-year performance period.

Focuses Executive Directors on 
delivering outstanding value 
creation for shareholders.

For awards granted during FY22 
onwards, there will be a two-year 
holding period on shares 
acquired from vested awards.

The value of dividends payable 
over the vesting period pay be 
added to the vested share 
awards in cash or shares.

Same clawback and malus 
provisions as for the 
performance related bonus.

The Committee chooses 
performance measures that 
support delivery of the 
Company’s strategy and provide 
alignment between Executive 
Directors and shareholders.

Performance metrics and their 
respective weightings may vary 
from year to year depending on 
financial and strategic priorities.

Up to 25% vests for threshold 
performance.

The Remuneration Committee 
has the discretion to adjust and 
to override formulaic outcomes 
for the LTIP vesting level if the 
Remuneration Committee 
considers it is not reflective of 
the underlying performance of 
the Company, as well investor 
experience and the employee 
reward outcome.

Shareholding 
guidelines

Executive Directors are expected 
to build and maintain a holding of 
shares in the Company of 200% 
of base salary.

Increases alignment between 
Executive Directors and 
shareholders and shows a clear 
commitment by all Executive 
Directors to creating value for 
shareholders in the longer term.

Minimum shareholding 
guidelines to be satisfied within 
five years of appointment of 
200% of salary for all Executive 
Directors.

N/A

If any Executive Director does 
not meet the guideline, they will 
be expected to retain up to 50% 
of the net of tax number of 
shares vesting under any of the 
Company’s discretionary share 
incentive arrangements until the 
guideline is met.

46

Executive Directors shall not 
dispose of shares needed to meet 
their minimum shareholding 
requirement except as approved 
by the Committee.

The Committee may give such 
approval in limited circumstances 
such as to comply with legal 
obligations or to avoid financial 
distress.

GovernanceNon-Executive Director remuneration framework

Element of 
remuneration

Fees

Key features

Purpose and link to strategy

Maximum opportunity

Performance measures

Cash fees, determined by the 
Executive Directors, reflecting the time 
commitment required, the 
responsibility of each role, and the 
level of fees in comparable 
companies.

Supports recruitment and retention of 
Non-Executive Directors with the 
necessary breadth of skills and 
experience to advise and assist with 
establishing and monitoring the Group’s 
strategic objectives.

The aggregate Directors’ service fees 
(excluding salary or other 
remuneration) is limited to £500,000 
under the Company’s Articles.

Internal evaluation of the Board’s and 
its Committees’ effectiveness takes 
place periodically.

No entitlement to compensation for 
early termination.

Policy on recruitment
In the case of hiring or appointing a new Executive Director, the Committee may make use of any or all of the existing components of remuneration, as described above. 
The Committee will take into consideration all relevant factors (including quantum, nature of remuneration and the jurisdiction from which the candidate operates) to 
ensure that the pay arrangements are in the best interests of the Company and its shareholders. Awards forfeited from the previous employer may be bought out 
like-for-like with equivalent bonus or LTIP awards over Next 15 shares.

Directors’ service contracts, policy on outside appointments and payments for loss of office
Executive Directors have rolling contracts that are terminable on six months’ notice. There are no contractual entitlements to compensation on termination of the 
employment of any of the Directors other than payment in lieu of notice at the discretion of the Company and a payment for compliance with post-termination restrictions. 

Executive Directors
Tim Dyson 
Peter Harris

Date of current service contract

Notice period

1 June 1997
25 March 2014

6 months
6 months

The Executive Directors are allowed to accept appointments and retain payments from sources outside the Group, provided such appointments are approved by 
the Board. 

Bonus and LTIP awards normally lapse if the Executive resigns. However, for a ‘good leaver’, part-year bonus may be payable, pro rata, and the Executive’s unvested 
awards may also vest subject to the achievement of the performance conditions, usually pro rata, for the proportion of the LTIP holding period employed.

47

GovernanceDirectors’ remuneration report continued

Non-Executive Directors’ letters of appointment
All Non-Executive Directors are engaged under letters of appointment terminable on three months’ notice at any time. Non-Executive Directors are not entitled to any 
pension benefit or any payment in compensation for early termination of their appointment. 

Non-Executive Directors
Penny Ladkin-Brand
Helen Hunter
Robyn Perriss

Illustrative performance scenarios

These charts illustrate, under three different 
performance scenarios, the total value of 
the remuneration package receivable by 
the Executive Directors for FY22. The 
assumptions used have been set out below.

Minimum: Comprises fixed pay only using 
the salary for FY22, the value of benefits 
in  FY21  and  a  10%  company  pension 
contribution. Tim Dyson also receives a 
pension benefit under a US 401k plan.

On-Target: A bonus of 30% of salary is 
payable  (50%  of  maximum)  for  target 
performance and half the LTIP awards vest 
(based on a grant value of 150% of salary).

£3,000k

£2,500k

£2,000k

£1,500k

£1,000k

£500k

£0k

Date of current letter of appointment

Notice period

1 February 2021
26 June 2019
10 November 2020

3 months
3 months
 3 months

£2,838k

£2,311k

£1,572k

34%

13%

53%

46%

18%

36%

£833k

100%

  Fixed pay 
  Annual bonus 
  LTIP 
  LTIP with 50% share price growth

£1,056k

£1,304k

14%
£710k
35%

51%

47%

19%

34%

£363k

100%

Below target

Target

Maximum

Below target

Target

Maximum

Chief Executive Officer

Chief Financial Officer

Maximum: Comprises fixed pay and assumes that the maximum annual bonus is paid (60% of salary) and the FY22 LTIP grant (150% of salary) vests in full. The maximum 
scenario includes an additional element to represent 50% share price growth on the LTIP award from the date of grant to vesting.

48

GovernanceComposition of the Committee and advice received
The Committee usually comprises three Non-Executive Directors: Helen Hunter the Committee Chair, Richard Eyre (until 31 January 2021), Penny Ladkin-Brand and 
Robyn Perriss (from 10 November 2020). The Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer attend the Committee meetings by invitation and assist the 
Committee in its deliberations, except when issues relating to their own remuneration are discussed. No Director is involved in deciding his or her own remuneration. 
The Company Secretary or his nominee acts as secretary to the Committee. The Committee is authorised, where it judges it necessary to discharge its responsibilities, 
to obtain independent professional advice at the Company’s expense.

Korn Ferry is appointed as adviser to the Committee. Korn Ferry is a signatory to the Remuneration Consultants’ Code of Conduct and has confirmed to the Committee 
that it adheres in all respects to the terms of the Code. Fees paid to Korn Ferry during the period were £49,776 (FY20, nil). This related to advice and support to the 
Committee on the Long-Term Incentive Plan, shareholder consultation and general remuneration matters. The Committee is satisfied that the advice it received from 
Korn Ferry is objective and independent.

Terms of reference and activities in the year
The activities of the Committee are governed by its terms of reference, which are available from the Group’s website at www.next15.com. The Committee had 10 
scheduled meetings during the year and details of attendance can be found in the Corporate Governance Report on page 28. 

The principal matters considered by the Committee during the year included:

•  reviewing the remuneration framework against the Group strategy and best practice corporate governance requirements;

•  undertaking the annual review of remuneration for both Executive Directors;

•  setting financial targets for the annual bonus plan FY21;

•  reviewing and setting appropriate stretching performance targets for the FY21 LTIP awards;

•  considering the remuneration arrangements of brand senior management;

•  reviewing the extent to which performance conditions have been met for both the annual and long-term incentive plans, and agreeing the cash and equity payments 

arising including the processes and communication to Executive Directors and senior executives;

•  reviewing the design, policies and targets of the Group’s equity incentive plans including their impact on dilution and headroom;

•  closely reviewing changes to laws, regulations and guidelines or recommendations regarding remuneration, including in relation to tax; and

•  continuing to review the Group’s approach to gender pay, diversity and inclusion policies.

49

GovernanceDirectors’ remuneration report continued

Key activities of the Committee for the year ahead
The principal matters for consideration by the Committee for the year ahead will include:

•  keeping the remuneration framework under review;

•  setting appropriate performance targets for the incentive schemes;

•  consideration to the principles governing the Group’s brand equity schemes and any adjustments required; 

•  continuing to review the Group’s approach to gender pay, diversity and inclusion policies; 

•  monitoring and reviewing best practice corporate governance requirements, changes to laws, regulations and tax; and

•  re-instate the review of remuneration structures for staff below Executive Director level.

Directors’ remuneration for the 12-month period to 31 January 2021

Executive Directors
Tim Dyson 
Peter Harris

Non-Executive Directors
Richard Eyre

Penny Ladkin-Brand

Helen Hunter

Robyn Perriss1

Salary
and fees
2021
£’000

Performance-
related
bonus
2021
£’000

LTIP awards
£’000 2

Pension
contributions
2021
£’000

Other
benefits
2021
£’000

634
291

135

45

41

8

—
—

—

—

—

—

426
203 

—

—

—

—

72
29

—

—

—

—

50
1

—

—

—

—

Total
2021
£’000

1,182
524

135

45

41

8

Total Fixed 
Pay 2021
£’000

Total Variable 
Pay 2021
£’000

756
321

135

45

41

8

426
203

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Total
2020
£’000 3 

1,110
482

150

46

31

—

1  Robyn Perriss joined the Board on 12 November 2020.

2 

 These figures comprise tranches of three LTIP awards which vest in relation to performance periods ending FY21, being those LTIP awards granted in May 2017, April 2018 and April 2019, valued using a share price 
of 529p, being the average share price over the last quarter of the period. 

3   These figures have been restated to reflect the actual value of the LTIPs on vesting for 2020 using a share price of 365p.

50

GovernancePerformance-related bonus
The annual bonus opportunity for FY21 was 60% of salary for both Executive Directors. Performance was based on four, equally weighted performance metrics. The formulaic 
outcome based on performance against targets would have resulted in a bonus pay-out of 100% of maximum as set out in the table below. As set out in the Chair’s letter, 
the Executive Directors waived their bonuses for FY21 taking into account the performance of the business as a whole for FY21 and the overall experience of shareholders.

Performance metric

Adjusted operating profit after lease liability interest*
Cash conversion ratio
Organic revenue decline
Adjusted operating profit margin

Total bonus (% of max)

Weighting
(% of max)

Target
range

Actual
performance

25%
25%
25%
25%

£38m–£41m
90–100%
(10.5)%-(4)%
15% - 15.6%

£47.9m
111%
(3.4%)
18.5%

Pay-out
for element
(% of element)

25%
25%
25%
25%

100%

* Excludes contribution from acquisition acquired after the reforecast in May 2020.

The bonuses for year ended 31 January 2021 were £nil ($nil) for Tim Dyson and £nil for Peter Harris.

Long-Term Incentive Plan
Awards vesting by reference to performance periods ending 31 January 2021
The historic awards granted to the Executive Directors which vested by reference to performance periods ending on 31 January 2021 are summarised below: 

FY18 LTIP grant (granted 2 May 2017)

Executive Director

Tim Dyson
Peter Harris

Number of
 performance
shares in
tranche 4

32,519
15,073

Percentage
of award
vesting

Number of
shares vesting
from tranche 4

Gain on vesting
£’000

100%
100%

32,519
15,073

172
80

Performance shares which vest in tranche 4 of the FY18 award will be released following the 31 January 2022 results (expected to be April 2022).

FY19 LTIP grant (granted 10 April 2018)

Executive Director

Tim Dyson
Peter Harris

Performance shares which vest in tranche 3 of the FY19 award will be released in April 2021.

Number of
performance
shares in
tranche 3

26,821
13,577

Percentage
of award
vesting

Number of
shares vesting
from tranche 3

Gain on vesting
£’000

100%
100%

26,821
13,577

142
72

51

GovernanceDirectors’ remuneration report continued

Long-Term Incentive Plan continued

FY20 LTIP grant (granted 28 April 2019)

Executive Director

Tim Dyson
Peter Harris

Number of
performance
shares in
tranche 2

25,644
11,769 

Percentage of
award vesting

82.5%
82.5%

Number of
shares vesting
from tranche 2

Gain on vesting
£’000

21,156
9,709

112
51

Performance shares which vest in tranche 2 of the FY20 award will be released following the 31 January 2022 results (expected to be April 2022).

Valued using a share price of 529p, being the average share price over the last quarter of the period.

Awards granted during FY21
The FY21 awards were granted to Executive Directors on 30 July 2020. The award covers a three-year period with the performance measured as an average of the 
performance over the period from 1 February 2020 to 31 January 2023. The performance criteria for the award is based 70% on adjusted EPS performance and 30% 
on a range of financial KPIs. Subject to performance against these conditions, the award will be released following the end of FY23. 

Executive Director

Number of performance shares

Tim Dyson

186,423

Vesting criteria (for both Executive Directors)

Up to 70% of maximum award
Absolute increase in adjusted diluted earnings per 
share over the 3-year performance period

Target
Less than 10%
10%
Between 10% and 20%

20% or more

Peter Harris

85,174

Proportion of award vesting 
0%
17.5%
17.5%–70% (straight-line basis)

70% total award

Up to 30% of maximum award

KPIs

Average annual organic net revenue growth over the 3-year  
performance period of 0% to 5%
Average annual adjusted operating profit (after lease liability interest) 
margin 16% to 18%

0%–15% 

0%–15%

52

Governance 
Directors’ interests in share plans for the year to 31 January 2021 
As at 31 January 2021 the following Directors held performance share awards over Ordinary Shares of 2.5p each under the 2005 LTIP, 2015 LTIP and 2016 Share Award 
Agreements, as detailed below:

Executive Director

Tim Dyson

Peter Harris

Number of
performance
shares at
1 February 2020

Shares
lapsing during
the period

Shares
released during
the period

158,694 
132,496
128,220
— 

73,557

67,073

58,847
—

 51,772 
 21,350 
20,413
— 

23,997

10,808

9,368
—

 74,404
—
—
— 

34,487

—

—
—

Shares
granted
during
the period

— 
— 
—
 186,423 

—

—

—
85,174

Number of
performance
shares at
31 January 2021

 32,519 
111,146
107,807
186,423

15,073

56,265

49,479
85,174

Grant date

02.05.2017
10.04.2018
26.04.2019
30.07.2020

End of
performance
period

31.01.2022 1
31.01.2023 2
31.01.2024 3
31.01.2023

02.05.2017

31.01.2022 1

10.04.2018

26.04.2019
30.07.2020

31.01.2023 2

31.01.2024 3
31.01.2023

Total gain
on vesting
£’000

272
—
—
—

126

—

—
—

1 

2 

3 

 As reported previously, the LTIP awards under the 2015 LTIP (granted from 2017) vest on a tranche basis over a total five-year period. Tranches representing a maximum of 20% of this award will vest by reference to 
performance periods ending 31 January 2021 but are not released until after 31 January 2022.

 Executive Directors will become unconditionally legally and beneficially entitled to up to 60% of the total awarded performance shares on the date on which vesting is determined in relation to the performance period 
ending 31 January 2021 (expected April 2021), and up to the remaining 40% on the date on which vesting is determined in relation to the performance period ending 31 January 2023 (expected April 2023).

 Executive Directors will become unconditionally legally and beneficially entitled to up to 60% of the total awarded performance shares on the date on which vesting is determined in relation to the performance period 
ending 31 January 2022 (expected April 2022). The Executive Directors will become unconditionally legal and beneficially entitled to the remaining 40% of the award on the date on which vesting is determined in relation 
to the performance period ending 31 January 2024 (expected April 2024). 

53

GovernanceDirectors’ remuneration report continued

Directors’ interests in the shares of Next Fifteen Communications Group plc 
The interests of the Directors in the share capital of the Company at 31 January 2020 and 31 January 2021 are as follows:

Executive Directors
Tim Dyson
Peter Harris

Non-Executive Directors

Richard Eyre

Penny Ladkin-Brand

Helen Hunter
Robyn Perriss

Ordinary Shares

LTIP performance shares

31 January
2020
(or date of
appointment
if later)

31 January
2021
(or date of
resignation
if earlier)

1 February
2020
(or date of
appointment
if later)

31 January
2021
(or date of
resignation
if earlier)

5,077,997 1
354,322 1

5,077,997 1
371,566 1

419,410 2
199,477 2

437,895 2
205,991 2

115,000

20,118

120,000

85,118

—
—

—
—

—

—

—
—

—

—

—
—

1 

in last year’s annual report, we included performance shares which had vested in relation to prior periods but not released.  As these shares are not issued shares they are now in the LTIP performance shares column.

2 

 In last year’s annual report, performance shares that had vested in relation to prior periods but not released were included in the ‘Ordinary Shares’ column.  As these shares are not issued shares they are now included 
in these numbers.

54

GovernanceTotal shareholder return
The Directors consider that a comparison of the Company’s total shareholder return to that of similar businesses on the Main Market is more relevant than a comparison 
with the FTSE AIM All-Share Index.

This graph shows the value on 31 January 2021 of £100 invested in the Company on 31 January 2012 compared with £100 invested in the FTSE Media Index and 
demonstrates the sustained and significant total shareholder return that we have delivered to shareholders over this period.

900.0

800.0

700.0

600.0

500.0

400.0

300.0

200.0

100.0

0
2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

2020

2021

Next 15

FTSE Media

How the remuneration framework will be applied for FY22

Salary
The CEO will not receive a salary increase for FY22. The CFO will receive a salary increase of 2.1% in line with / which is less than, the average increase awarded to 
the workforce. 

Executive Director

Tim Dyson
Peter Harris

Salary with
effect from
1 February 2020

Salary with
effect from
1 February 2021

$906,206
£323,068

$906,206
£330,000

Increase

0%
2.1%

55

GovernanceDirectors’ remuneration report continued

How the remuneration framework will be applied for FY22 continued

Non-Executive Director fees
Following the review of NED remuneration, the following increases will take effect from 1 February.

Fee

Non-Executive Chair fee
Non-Executive Director base fee
Senior Independent Director fee

Audit Committee Chair fee

Remuneration Committee Chair fee

Fee with
effect from
1 February 2020

Fee with
effect from
1 February 2021

£150,000
£40,000
£5,000

£6,000

£6,000

£150,000
£53,000
£5,000

£7,000

£7,000

Increase

0%
32.5%
0%

+16.7%

+16.7%

Pension and benefits
Pension will remain capped at 10% of base salary for both Executive Directors. Tim Dyson is also entitled to a small pension under a US 401k pension plan. 

Benefits will operate in line with FY21.

Annual bonus
The annual bonus opportunity will remain at 60% of salary for FY22, payable in cash. Performance will be measured against adjusted operating profit, cash conversion 
ratio, organic revenue growth and adjusted operating profit margin, all equally weighted. The Committee considers the bonus targets to be commercially sensitive but 
commits to full retrospective disclosure in next year’s Remuneration Report. 

56

GovernanceLong-term incentive
The Executive Directors will be granted LTIP awards of 150% of salary. Performance will be measured over a single three-year performance period to 31 January 2024. 
The awards will vest based on the achievement of the following performance conditions and targets over the three-year performance period: 

Performance condition

Absolute increase in adjusted diluted EPS over the performance period at a constant tax rate
Average annual organic net revenue growth
Average annual adjusted operating profit (after lease liability interest) margin

A two-year post-vesting holding period applies to vested awards.

Weighting
(% of salary)

Threshold 
(25% vests)

Maximum 
(100% vests)

100%
25%
25%

20%
4%
18%

50%
7.5%
20%

The Committee will have discretion to override the formulaic outcome of the incentives in certain circumstances. Clawback and malus provisions will apply.

57

GovernanceDirectors’ indemnity
In accordance with its Articles of Association the Company 
has entered into contractual indemnities with each of the 
Directors in respect of its liabilities incurred as a result of 
their office. In respect of those liabilities for which Directors 
may not be indemnified, the Company maintained a Directors’ 
and Officers’ Liability Insurance policy throughout the period. 
Although the Directors’ defence costs may be met, neither 
the Company’s indemnity nor the insurance policy provides 
cover in the event that the Director is proved to have acted 
dishonestly or fraudulently. No claims have been made 
under the indemnity or against the policy.

Acquisitions
The following is a summary of Group acquisitions made in 
the year to 31 January 2021, more detailed disclosure of 
which can be found in note 26 to the financial statements.

On 15 July 2020, Next 15 purchased the entire share capital 
of Implementra Limited (trading as Conversion Rate Experts) 
(‘CRE’). The initial consideration for the acquisition was 
approximately £5.9m, which was settled with £4.6m of cash 
and the issue of 351,806 of new Ordinary Shares in Next 15. 
Further contingent consideration may be payable around 
April 2023 and April 2025 based on the EBIT performance 
of CRE over the next five years.

On 25 August 2020, Next 15 acquired Mach49 LLC, Mach49 
Limited and Mach49 Singapore Pte Ltd, the Silicon Valley-based 
growth incubator for global businesses. The initial consideration 
for the acquisition was approximately $2m settled in full in 
cash, with a further $3.7m deferred. Further contingent 
consideration may be payable around April 2023, April 2024 
and April 2025 based on the EBIT performance of Mach49. 
The contingent consideration that becomes payable may 
be satisfied by cash or up to 15% in new ordinary shares, at 
the option of Next 15. 

On 31 October 2020, Next 15 acquired To This Day Limited 
and its subsidiary Marlin PR Limited. The initial consideration 
for the acquisition was approximately £1.9m, which was 
settled with £1.5m of cash and the issue of 101,777 of new 
Ordinary Shares in Next 15. Further contingent consideration 
may be payable around April 2021 and April 2022 based 
on the EBITDA performance of Marlin over the remaining 
year.

Report of the Directors

The Directors present their Annual Report together with the 
audited financial statements of Next Fifteen Communications 
Group plc (the ‘Company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) 
for the year ended 31 January 2021.

The Group has chosen, in accordance with section 414C(11) 
of the Companies Act 2006, to include such matters of 
strategic importance to the Group in the Strategic Report 
which otherwise would be required to be disclosed in this 
Directors’ Report.

Group results and dividends
The Group’s results for the period are set out in the Consolidated 
Income Statement on page 76. The Directors recommend 
a final dividend of 7p per ordinary share to be paid on Friday 
13 August 2021, which gives a total dividend of the period 
of 7p per ordinary share (2020: 2.5p). Due to the outbreak 
of Covid-19, the FY20 final dividend and the FY21 interim 
dividend were suspended.

Directors
Details of Directors who served during the year and biographies 
for Directors currently in office can be found on pages 24, 
25 and 27.

Details of the Directors’ remuneration, share options, service 
agreements and interests in the Company’s shares are 
provided in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 
40 to 57.

Except for Directors’ service contracts, no Director has a 
material interest in any contract to which the Company or 
any of its subsidiaries is a party.

58

GovernanceSignificant post-balance sheet events
Subsequent to the year end, on 9 April 2021, Next 15 acquired 
Shopper Media Group Ltd (“SMG”) and its subsidiaries. SMG 
is a UK based agency specialising in commerce marketing 
activation, connecting retailers and brands with shoppers 
at the point of purchase both online and in-store. The initial 
consideration is approximately £15.7m, which will be settled 
with £11.8m of cash and the issue of 569,181 new Ordinary 
Shares in Next 15. Further consideration may be payable 
around June 2023 and June 2025 based on the EBITDA 
performance of SMG in the two year periods ending 31 January 
2023 and 31 January 2025. 

Likely future developments in the business of the Company
The Group’s priorities for 2021/22 are disclosed in the Strategic 
Report on pages 1 to 23.

Research & Development
During the year many of our brands undertook R&D activities 
as part of their work developing leading technological solutions 
for their clients. Several of our market research agencies 
have innovated to automate manually intensive research 
processes by developing bespoke software designed to 
manage the huge amount of data gathered daily by their clients. 

Employees and workers
Our employees and workers are considered one of the 
Company’s principal stakeholders as described in the Corporate 
Governance Report on pages 26 to 35.

Equal opportunities
The Group seeks to recruit, develop and employ throughout 
the organisation suitably qualified, capable and experienced 
people, irrespective of sex, age, race, disability, religion or 
belief, marital or civil partnership status or sexual orientation. 
The Group gives full and fair consideration to all applications 
for employment made by people with disabilities, having 
regard to their particular aptitudes and abilities.

Any candidate with a disability will not be excluded unless 
it is clear that the candidate is unable to perform a duty that 
is intrinsic to the role, having taken into account reasonable 
adjustments. Reasonable adjustments to the recruitment 
process will be made to ensure that no applicant is disadvantaged 
because of his or her disability. The Group’s policies for 
training, career development and promotion do not disadvantage 
people with disabilities.

2. 

 the Director has taken all steps that they ought to have 
taken as a Director in order to make themselves aware 
of any relevant audit information and to ensure that the 
Company’s External Auditor is aware of that information.

This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in 
accordance with the provisions of section 418 of the Companies 
Act 2006.

Diversity and inclusion
The Group’s approach to diversity and inclusion is set out 
on page 33 and on our website at www.next15.com. Our 
approach to Board diversity is set out on page 29.

Health and safety
The Group recognises and accepts its responsibilities for 
health, safety and the environment. The Group is committed 
to maintaining a safe and healthy working environment in 
accordance with applicable requirements at all locations in 
the UK and overseas. The Chief Financial Officer is responsible 
for the implementation of the Group policy on health and safety.

Cyber security
During the year, Chris Dare joined Next 15 as our Chief 
Technology Officer. Since joining, Chris has conducted a 
thorough review of the Group’s IT systems and has developed 
a roadmap for improvement. This has included redeveloping 
our Information & Cyber Security policies across the group 
to ensure we meet industry best practice, we have continued 
the rollout of group wide security systems, including to 
new acquisitions.

Disclosure of information to the External Auditor
Each of the persons who is a Director at the date of approval 
of this report confirms that:

1. 

 so far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit 
information of which the Company’s External Auditor is 
unaware; and

Annual General Meeting
It is our current intention to hold the Annual General Meeting 
(the ‘AGM’) of Next Fifteen Communications Group plc (the 
‘Company’) at our offices located at 75 Bermondsey Street, 
London SE1 3XF on 24 June 2021 at 3.00 p.m. Because of 
the restrictions arising from the Covid-19 situation, arrangements 
for the AGM may be subject to change, possibly at short 
notice. Currently the measures that the UK government has 
put in place as a result of the Covid-19 pandemic mean that 
attendance at the AGM in person will not be possible and 
shareholders or their appointed proxies (other than the chair 
of the Annual General Meeting) will not be permitted entry 
to the AGM. should this be the case, the Company will put 
in place arrangements such that the legal requirements to 
hold the meeting can be satisfied and the meeting will 
proceed with only such attendees, employees and AGM 
support staff as are strictly required and will include only 
the formal business set out in the Notice of Meeting. The 
Company is exploring ways to engage shareholders if they 
are unable to attend in person, including through an online 
interactive webcast. Details of this and any changes to the 
AGM will be made available via our website. We strongly 
encourage you to vote on all resolutions by completing an 
online proxy appointment form in advance of the meeting, 
appointing the chair of the meeting as your proxy.

59

GovernanceReport of the Directors continued

Annual General Meeting continued
The Notice of AGM and explanatory notes regarding the 
ordinary and special business to be put to the meeting will 
be set out in a separate circular to shareholders, which will 
be made available on the Group’s website at www.next15.com 
and will be mailed to shareholders who have requested a 
paper copy.

Significant shareholdings
As at 31 March 2021 the Company had received the notifications 
below of the following significant beneficial holdings in the 
issued Ordinary Share capital carrying rights to vote in all 
circumstances of the Company. The percentage holding is 
based on the Company’s issued share capital at the date 
of the notification.

Political donations
It is the Group’s policy not to make donations for political 
purposes and, accordingly, there were no payments to 
political organisations during the year (2020: £Nil).

Charitable donations
During the year ended 31 January 2021, the Group donated 
£69,925 to various charities (2020: £56,857).

Acquisition of shares
Acquisitions of shares by the Next Fifteen Employee Trust 
purchased during the period are as described in note 22 
to the financial statements.

Financial instruments
Information on the Group’s financial risk management objectives, 
policies and activities and on the Group’s exposure to relevant 
risks in respect of financial instruments is set out in note 19 
and in the Strategic Report on pages 16 to 20.

External Auditor
The Board appointed Deloitte LLP to act as External Auditor 
for the year ended 31 January 2021. A resolution to reappoint 
Deloitte LLP as External Auditor of the Company and to 
authorise the Board to fix their remuneration will be proposed 
at the forthcoming AGM.

2021

Total

Liontrust Asset Management  
Octopus Investments 
Aviva Investors  
Aberdeen Standard 
Investments 
Tim Dyson 
BlackRock
Canaccord Genuity Wealth 
Management 
Herald Investment 
Management 
Slater Investments 
Bestinver Asset Management

12,796,223
12,739,265
10,657,356

6,849,633
5,077,997
4,641,977

4,244,777

3,841,419
3,289,152
3,222,169

%

14.07
14.05
11.75

7.91
5.86
5.08

4.98

4.44
3.80
3.72

Financial reporting and going concern statement
The Directors have, at the time of approving the financial 
statements, a reasonable expectation that the Company 
and the Group have adequate resources to continue in 
operational existence for the foreseeable future. Accordingly, 
they continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing 
the financial statements. 

The Directors have made this assessment in light of reviewing 
the Group’s budget and cash requirements for a period in 
excess of one year from the date of signing of the annual 
report and considered outline plans for the Group thereafter. 

60

The Group’s business activities, together with the factors 
likely to affect its future development, performance and 
position, are set out in the Strategic Report on pages 1 to 
22. The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity 
position and borrowing facilities are described in the Financial 
Review on pages 10 to 15. 

In addition, note 19 to the financial statements includes: the 
Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its 
capital; its financial risk management objectives; details of 
its financial instruments and hedging activities; and its exposures 
to credit risk and liquidity risk. 

The Directors’ Responsibilities Statement in respect of the 
financial statements is set out on page 61.

Approved by the Board on 12 April 2021 and signed on its 
behalf by:

Penny Ladkin-Brand
Chair of the Board
12 April 2021.

GovernanceDirectors’ responsibilities statement

The Directors are responsible for preparing the annual report 
and the financial statements in accordance with applicable 
law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial 
statements for each financial year. Under that law the Directors 
are required to prepare the Group financial statements in 
accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards 
(‘IFRSs’) and Article 4 of the IAS Regulation and have elected 
to prepare the parent company financial statements in 
accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards 
and applicable law), including FRS 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure 
Framework’. Under company law the Directors must not 
approve the accounts unless they are satisfied that they 
give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the company 
and of the profit or loss of the Company for that period. 

In preparing the parent company financial statements, the 
Directors are required to:

•  select  suitable  accounting  policies  and  then  apply 

them consistently;

•  make judgements and accounting estimates that are 

reasonable and prudent;

•  state whether FRS 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ 
has been followed, subject to any material departures 
disclosed and explained in the financial statements; and

•  prepare the financial statements on the going concern 
basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Company 
will continue in business.

In preparing the Group financial statements, International 
Accounting Standard 1 requires that Directors:

Responsibility statement 
We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

•  properly select and apply accounting policies;

•  present information, including accounting policies, in a 
manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and 
understandable information; 

•  provide additional disclosures when compliance with the 
specific requirements in IFRSs are insufficient to enable 
users to understand the impact of particular transactions, 
other events and conditions on the entity’s financial position 
and financial performance; and

•  make an assessment of the Company’s ability to continue 

as a going concern.

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting 
records that are sufficient to show and explain the Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any 
time the financial position of the Company and enable them 
to ensure that the financial statements comply with the 
Companies Act 2006. They are also responsible for safeguarding 
the assets of the Company and hence for taking reasonable 
steps  for  the  prevention  and  detection  of  fraud  and 
other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information included 
on the Company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom 
governing the preparation and dissemination of financial 
statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

•  the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the 
relevant financial reporting framework, give a true and 
fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and 
profit or loss of the Company and the undertakings included 
in the consolidation taken as a whole;

•  the Strategic Report includes a fair review of the development 
and performance of the business and the position of the 
Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation 
taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal 
risks and uncertainties that they face; and

•  the annual report and financial statements, taken as a 
whole, are fair, balanced and understandable and provide 
the information necessary for shareholders to assess the 
Company’s position and performance, business model 
and strategy.

This responsibility statement was approved by the Board 
of Directors on 12 April 2021 and is signed on its behalf by:

Peter Harris
Chief Financial Officer

61

Governance2. Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing 
(UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under those standards are 
further described in the auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial 
statements section of our report. 

We are independent of the group and the parent company in accordance with the 
ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the 
UK, including the Financial Reporting Council’s (the ‘FRC’s’) Ethical Standard as 
applied to listed entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in 
accordance with these requirements. 

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate 
to provide a basis for our opinion.

Independent auditors’ report
to the members of Next Fifteen Communications Group plc

Report on the audit of the financial statements

1. Opinion
In our opinion:

•  the financial statements of Next Fifteen Communications Group plc (the ‘parent 
company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘group’) give a true and fair view of the state 
of the group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at 31 January 2021 and of 
the group’s loss for the year then ended;

•  the group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with 
international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006;

•  the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance 
with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice, including Financial 
Reporting Standard 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”; and

•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements 

of the Companies Act 2006.

We have audited the financial statements which comprise:

•  the consolidated income statement;

•  the consolidated statement of comprehensive income;

•  the consolidated and parent company balance sheets;

•  the consolidated and parent company statements of changes in equity;

•  the consolidated cash flow statement; and

•  the related notes 1 to 30 and the parent company related notes 1 to 13.

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the 
group financial statements is applicable law and international accounting standards 
in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. The financial 
reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the parent company 
financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards, 
including FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework” (United Kingdom Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice).

62

Financial statements3. Summary of our audit approach

Key audit matters

The key audit matters that we identified in the current year were:

•  valuation of contingent consideration on the acquisition of Mach-49;

•  valuation of acquisition-related liabilities; and

•  classification and presentation of adjusting items.

Within this report, key audit matters are identified as follows:

 Newly identified

 Increased level of risk

 Similar level of risk

 Decreased level of risk

Materiality

The materiality that we used for the group financial statements was £1.75m which was determined on the basis of considering a number of different 
measures including adjusted profit before tax and revenue.

Scoping

Components of the group subject to full scope audits account for 73.4% of the Group’s revenue and 83.6% of Adjusted Profit before Tax. 

Significant changes 
in our approach

We have not identified any new key audit matters in the current year, although we have amended the key audit matter relating to the valuation 
of acquired intangibles from prior year to focus on the valuation of contingent consideration on significant acquisitions this year. 

We no longer identified impairment of acquired goodwill as a key audit matter. This was due to improved trading performance in the majority of 
brands during the financial year which resulted in sufficient headroom across all CGUs; there were no impairment indicators identified.

The Group has not been impacted by Covid-19 as severely as was forecast in last year’s reasonable worst case scenario; as a result we did not 
identify a key audit matter in relation to going concern. 

There are no other significant changes in our approach apart from these changes in key audit matters. 

63

Financial statementsIndependent auditors’ report continued
to the members of Next Fifteen Communications Group plc

4. Conclusions relating to going concern
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the financial statements 
is appropriate.

Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the group’s and parent company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting included:

•  assessing the assumptions used in the forecasts, including the appropriateness of the modelling of downside scenarios; 

•  testing the clerical accuracy of those forecasts and assessing the historical accuracy of forecasts prepared by management; 

•  assessing the linkage to business model and medium-term risks, including likely draws on cash such as proposed acquisitions; 

•  assessing the availability of financing facilities including nature of facilities, repayment terms and covenants; 

•  calculating the amount of headroom in the forecasts and undertaking sensitivity analysis to determine what changes would be required to breach cash requirements 

or covenant compliance; and 

•   assessing the appropriateness of the disclosures made in the financial statements.

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast 
significant doubt on the group’s and parent company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least twelve months from when the financial statements 
are authorised for issue.

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections of this report.

5. Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the financial statements of the current period and 
include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. These matters included those which had the greatest 
effect on: the overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team.

These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate 
opinion on these matters.

64

Financial statements5. Key audit matters continued
5.1. Valuation of contingent consideration on the acquisition of Mach 49 

Key audit matter  
description

The Group’s acquisitions during the year resulted in the recognition of £10.6m (2020: £18.9m) of intangible assets and £14.7m (2020: £22.3m) 
of goodwill, along with £12.9m (2020: £14.4m) of discounted contingent consideration. 

The acquisition date valuation of contingent consideration is based on management’s estimates of the forecast future revenue and EBIT for 
the acquired company over a period of typically 2-5 years. 

Given the uncertainty in estimating the future performance of acquired businesses and the fact that the forecast growth and EBIT directly 
impact the estimate of contingent consideration in the acquisition accounting, we have determined this to be a key audit matter. 

Of the acquisitions made in FY21, the acquisition of Mach 49 has a material amount of contingent consideration and as such we have 
pinpointed our risk to the calculation of contingent consideration of this business as at the date of acquisition. The other acquisitions are 
less sensitive to these judgements, having proportionally less contingent consideration and few material acquired intangibles. 

The total present value of consideration at acquisition date for Mach 49 is £13.7m of which £12.2m is contingent on Mach 49’s performance 
against revenue and profit targets. There is increased uncertainty in this estimation as Mach-49 is a relatively young business with a short 
track record and high growth ambitions. The consideration is also uncapped, meaning that the actual consideration paid could be significantly 
higher than that recorded at acquisition date. 

These estimates are sensitive to changes in forecast performance of the business acquired and as such management has set out that this 
is a key source of estimation uncertainty in Note 1 and a sensitivity analysis in Note 17 to the financial statements. For further details, see the 
Report of the Directors, the Financial Review and notes 1, 2, 11 and 26 to the financial statements.

How the scope of our 
audit responded to the 
key audit matter

In order to address the key audit matter relating to the valuation of contingent consideration, our audit work included: 

•   obtaining an understanding of relevant controls over the valuation of contingent consideration; 

•  considering the appropriateness of management’s process for identifying and valuing contingent consideration;

•  performing sensitivity analyses on the forecast assumptions;

•  challenging revenue growth and profit margin assumptions, using both corroborative and contradictory sources of information including 

the original diligence reports, comparator companies and updated forecast figures;

•  working with our internal valuation specialists to challenge the discount rate used and provide supporting information on market comparators; 

•  evaluating subsequent information available; and

•  assessing whether the disclosures within the financial statements adequately explain the nature of this acquisition.

Key observations

Based on the evidence received, we concluded that the valuation of contingent consideration on acquisition is appropriate. We are satisfied 
with the disclosures made in the financial statements.

65

Financial statements 
Independent auditors’ report continued
to the members of Next Fifteen Communications Group plc

5. Key audit matters continued
5.2. Valuation of acquisition-related liabilities 

Key audit matter  
description

As at 31 January 2021, the Group had £53.7m of acquisition-related liabilities (2020: £48.3m) which consist mainly of contingent consideration 
payable based on a share of the average profit of the businesses previously acquired. These liabilities are estimated upon acquisition and 
subsequently revised at the Group’s financial year end.

The values of these liabilities remain highly judgemental until settled as they are based on forecast future performance of specific brands. 
As these liabilities are held at fair value, a change in the estimate of revenue growth or profitability a brand could result in a material charge 
to the income statement. These changes are recorded in the income statement each period and in the current year the charge arising from 
changes in estimates is £8.1m as set out in Note 17. 

Our audit has specifically focused on the valuation of the liabilities in respect of Agent 3 and Activate. There is a risk that these liabilities are 
incorrectly valued if they are based on inappropriate forecast and discount rate assumptions. Given the sensitivity, management has set out 
that this is a key source of estimation uncertainty in Note 1 and included a sensitivity analysis in Note 17 to the financial statements. 

For further details, see and notes 1, 2 and 17 to the financial statements.

How the scope of our 
audit responded to 
the key audit matter

In order to address the key audit matter relating to the valuation of acquisition-related liabilities, our audit work included:

•  obtaining an understanding of relevant controls over the valuation of acquisition-related liabilities process;

•  performing sensitivity analyses on the forecast assumptions;

•  challenging revenue growth and profit margin assumptions by considering the historical accuracy of budgeting and benchmark data;

•  challenging the forecast estimates, to determine the amount of earnout liability to be accrued and whether changes in the estimate are 

based on information obtained post acquisition;

•  involving our valuation specialists to determine whether the discount rate applied falls within an acceptable range; 

•  agreeing settlements in the year and post year end to bank statements or other documentation; and

•  assessing whether the disclosures within the financial statements adequately explain the nature and change in estimate of these 

acquisition-related liabilities.

Key observations

Based on the evidence received, we concluded that the Directors’ judgements regarding future performance of the brands with acquisition-related 
liabilities are appropriate. 

The discount rate applied is within our acceptable range.

We are satisfied with the disclosures made in the financial statements.

66

Financial statements 
5. Key audit matters continued
5.3. Classification and Presentation of Adjusting Items 

Key audit matter  
description

The Group presents a number of Adjusted Performance Measures including Adjusted Operating Profit, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted Profit 
Before Tax and Adjusted Earnings per Share. Loss Before Tax for the year was £1.3m (2020: profit £5.6m) compared to Adjusted Profit Before 
Tax of £49.1m (2020: £40.2m).

The Group receives certain income and incurs certain costs that management believe should be presented separately in order to aid the 
users understanding of financial performance. 

Judgement is required when determining the accounting policy for Adjusting Items and subsequently when determining the classification 
of transactions as Adjusting Items in accordance with that policy. While there is no definition of Adjusting Items within IFRS, this is an area of 
focus for regulators and investors and there is a risk that items may be classified as Adjusting Items which are not appropriate and may distort 
the reported Adjusted Profit. 

The key audit matter is focused on whether the following Adjusting Items in particular are appropriate and whether they are adequately 
disclosed by the Group in the financial statements:

Amortisation of acquired intangibles (charge of £15.0m (2020: £12.1m)): The Group classifies amortisation on acquired intangibles as an 
Adjusting Item. Judgement is applied in the allocation of the purchase price between intangibles and goodwill, and in determining the useful 
economic lives of the acquired intangibles. The judgements made by the Group are inevitably different to those made by those of other 
companies and as such, the Directors’ view is that amortisation of acquired intangibles should be added back to aid comparability with peers.

Restructuring costs (charge of £2.7m (2020: £4.6m)): For these to be classified as Adjusting Items, they should relate to clearly identifiable 
initiatives and should not recur year on year or for an undefined period. In the year there have been a number of redundancies, some caused 
by the Covid pandemic, and as such these are deemed by the Directors to be adjusting items. 

Growth share schemes (charge of £2.4m (2020: £0.4m)): Share-based payments are a cost of acquiring a business and relieve companies 
of an alternative cash expense. The Directors have however classified growth share scheme charges as Adjusting Items as the legal form 
of the Group’s scheme means that while the mechanism is aimed at incentivising management performance over a period of time, the full 
charge is booked upfront at the grant date as there is no vesting period. 

Employment-linked consideration on acquisitions (charge of £8.0m (2020: £5.0m)): Employment-linked earnout payments are built up through the 
income statement over the employment term. The Directors have classified the employment-linked consideration on acquisition as an Adjusting 
Item on the basis that the expense relates to the cost of acquiring those businesses, rather than reflecting the underlying business performance. 

Right of use asset impairment (charge of £10.0m (2020: nil): Management have undertaken an exercise to rationalise the property portfolio 
of the Group and exit certain properties deemed surplus to requirement. The Directors have classified the right of use asset impairment as 
an Adjusting Item as it is deemed to be one-off in nature and is not related to the underlying performance of the business. 

Furlough support repaid post year-end (credit of £1.4m (2020: nil): The Directors have added back the credit in the income statement for UK 
furlough income claimed in the year. Since year end, the Group have announced that they will repay the full UK furlough amount of £1.4m 
(2020: nil). The Directors have classified the repayment of the UK furlough as an Adjusting Item as it does not relate to the underlying 
performance of the Group and therefore adjusting for it allows comparability year on year. A further £0.7m (2020: nil) claimed in other 
jurisdictions have not been classified as an Adjusting item as management does not to intend to repay this.

For further details, see the Financial Review and notes 1, 2 and 5 to the financial statements.

67

Financial statements 
Independent auditors’ report continued
to the members of Next Fifteen Communications Group plc

5. Key audit matters continued
5.3. Classification and Presentation of Adjusting Items 

 continued

How the scope of our 
audit responded to 
the key audit matter

In order to address the key audit matter relating to the classification and presentation of Adjusting items, our audit work included:

•  obtaining an understanding of relevant controls over the financial reporting process;

•  understanding the rationale for classifying balances as Adjusting Items, considering whether this is reasonable, in line with the Group’s 

accounting policy and whether there is consistent treatment of items that increase and decrease Adjusted Profit measures;

•  challenging whether any other items of income or expense ought to be included in or excluded from Adjusting Items by considering the 

nature of the item;

•  considering whether the classification of Adjusting Items is consistent with industry peers; 

•  evaluating whether the Group’s policy to exclude each cost from Adjusted is appropriate in light of IFRS requirements, ESMA (European 

Securities and Markets Authority) and FRC guidance; and

•  assessing whether the disclosures within the financial statements adequately explain the nature of these items and how adjusted results 

are reconciled to statutory results.

Key observations

Based on the evidence received, we concur with the Directors’ assertion that the Adjusting Items are in line with the Group’s accounting 
policies as disclosed in notes 1, 2 and 5 to the financial statements and that the presentation classification of items of expense and income 
as Adjusting Items is consistent between the periods presented. We did not identify any other material items that should be adjusted for.

While some of the Adjusting Items excluded by the Group are recurring items, we are satisfied that these items are adjusted consistently in 
each period, are sufficiently explained and reconciled in the financial statements and that overall the financial statements are appropriately 
balanced in their presentation of statutory and non-statutory measures.

68

Financial statements6. Our application of materiality
6. 1 Materiality

We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that makes it probable that the economic decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable 
person would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both in planning the scope of our audit work and in evaluating the results of our work.

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

Group financial statements

Parent company financial statements

Materiality

£1.75m (2020: £1.75m)

£1.58m (2020: £1.58m)

Basis for determining 
materiality

Materiality has been determined on the basis of considering 
a number of different measures including Adjusted Profit 
Before Tax and Revenue.

Parent company materiality represents 0.95% (2020: 1.09%) of net assets of 
£166.2m (2020: £145.6m). 

Rationale for the 
benchmark applied

This is consistent with the prior year.

We considered a number of relevant benchmarks in our 
determination of materiality. Adjusted Profit Before Tax is a 
significant metric used in reporting the results for the Group 
as this is the key performance indicator for the users of the 
financial statements. In addition, we incorporated Revenue 
and Net Revenue as additional benchmark as they reflects 
the growth of the Group.

Materiality, representing approximately 3.6% (2020: 4.4%) of 
adjusted profit before tax and 0.6% (2020: 0.6%) of revenue. 

The Parent company is a holding company, and net assets is indicative of the 
company’s ability to support its subsidiaries.

threshold £0.09m95+5

Component materiality range 
(excluding parent company) 
£0.66m to £0.60m

Audit Committee reporting 

Group materiality £1.75m

Adjusted PBT £49m

  Adjusted PBT

  Group materiality

69

Financial statementsIndependent auditors’ report continued
to the members of Next Fifteen Communications Group plc

6. Our application of materiality continued
6.2 Performance materiality

We set performance materiality at a level lower than materiality to reduce the probability that, in aggregate, uncorrected and undetected misstatements exceed the 
materiality for the financial statements as a whole. 

Performance materiality

68.5% (2020: 65%) of group materiality

65% (2020: 65%) of parent company materiality 

Group financial statements

Parent company financial statements

Basis and rationale for 
determining performance 
materiality

We have set out the significant circumstances behind the professional judgements made in determining performance materiality for this audit. The 
specific factors were:

a.  we considered the quality of the control environment and that it 
was not appropriate to rely on controls over a number of business 
processes;

a.  we considered the quality of the control environment and that it 
was not appropriate to rely on controls over a number of business 
processes;

b. there is an effective corporate governance structure;

b. there is an effective corporate governance structure;

c. low level of uncorrected misstatements;

c. low level of uncorrected misstatements;

d. no prior period adjustments; 

d. no prior period adjustments; and

e.  consideration of the resultant value in the context of how materiality 
has remained constant but decreased as a percentage of its 
benchmark; and

f.  there is maturity within the executive management team, with 

little turnover.

e.  there is maturity within the executive management team, with 

little turnover.

6.3  Error reporting threshold

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to the Committee all audit differences in excess of £0.09m (2020: £0.09m), as well as differences below that 
threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to the Audit Committee on disclosure matters that we identified when assessing 
the overall presentation of the financial statements.

70

Financial statements7. An overview of the scope of our audit
7.1. Identification and scoping of components

In selecting the components that are in scope each year, we obtained an understanding of the Group and its environment, including an understanding of the Group’s 
system of internal controls, and assessing the risks of material misstatement at the Group level. The components were also selected to provide an appropriate basis 
on which to undertake audit work to address the identified risks of material misstatement. Audit work to respond to the risks of material misstatement was performed 
directly by the group audit engagement team.

Such audit work represents a combination of procedures, all of which are designed to target the Group’s identified risks of material misstatement in the most effective 
manner possible. Based on our assessment, we focused our audit work on 19 components, 15 of which were subject to full audit scope and 4 were subject to specified 
audit procedures. Our procedures on full audit scope components provided coverage of 73.4% of the Group’s consolidated revenue and 83.6% of the Group’s Adjusted 
Profit Before Tax. 

Our audit work at the components, excluding the parent company, is executed at levels of materiality appropriate for such components, which in all instances are capped 
at 55% of Group materiality. 

For all remaining components, we have performed centralised analytical procedures at component materiality.

The range of component materialities we have used are from £600,000 to £660,000 (2020: (£136,000 to £621,000)).

All of the work was performed by the group engagement team.

8. Other information

The other information comprises the information included in the annual report, other than the financial statements and our auditor’s report 
thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information contained within the annual report.

We have nothing to report 
in this regard.

Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our 
report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with 
the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated.

If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether this gives rise to 
a material misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a 
material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact.

71

Financial statementsIndependent auditors’ report continued
to the members of Next Fifteen Communications Group plc

9. Responsibilities of directors
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied 
that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free 
from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the parent company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing 
as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the group or the parent 
company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

10. Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or 
error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in 
accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually 
or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at: www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description 
forms part of our auditor’s report.

11.  Extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in line with our responsibilities, outlined above, to 
detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including fraud. The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud is 
detailed below. 

11.1 Identifying and assessing potential risks related to irregularities

In identifying and assessing risks of material misstatement in respect of irregularities, including fraud and non-compliance with laws and regulations, we considered the following:

•  the nature of the industry and sector, control environment and business performance including the design of the group’s remuneration policies, key drivers for 

directors’ remuneration, bonus levels and performance targets;

•  results of our enquiries of management, internal audit and the audit committee about their own identification and assessment of the risks of irregularities; 

•  any matters we identified having obtained and reviewed the group’s documentation of their policies and procedures relating to:

•  identifying, evaluating and complying with laws and regulations and whether they were aware of any instances of non-compliance;

•  detecting and responding to the risks of fraud and whether they have knowledge of any actual, suspected or alleged fraud;

•  the internal controls established to mitigate risks of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations;

72

Financial statements11.  Extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud continued
11.1 Identifying and assessing potential risks related to irregularities continued

•   the matters discussed among the audit engagement team and relevant internal specialists, including tax and valuations, regarding how and where fraud might occur 

in the financial statements and any potential indicators of fraud.

As a result of these procedures, we considered the opportunities and incentives that may exist within the organisation for fraud and identified the greatest potential for 
fraud in the following areas: completeness of rebates in revenue agreements whereby we identified Brand management could potentially enter into agreements with 
customers to provide discounted services and not record these appropriately. In common with all audits under ISAs (UK), we are also required to perform specific 
procedures to respond to the risk of management override.

We also obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory framework that the group operates in, focusing on provisions of those laws and regulations that had a 
direct effect on the determination of material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. The key laws and regulations we considered in this context included 
UK Companies Act, AIM Listing Rules and tax legislation.

In addition, we considered provisions of other laws and regulations that do not have a direct effect on the financial statements but compliance with which may be 
fundamental to the group’s ability to operate or to avoid a material penalty. This includes the group’s compliance with GDPR.

11.2 Audit response to risks identified

As a result of performing the above, we did not identify any key audit matters related to the potential risk of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations. 

Our procedures to respond to risks identified included the following:

•  Reviewing the financial statement disclosures and testing to supporting documentation to assess compliance with provisions of relevant laws and regulations described 

as having a direct effect on the financial statements;

•  enquiring of management, the audit committee and in-house legal counsel concerning actual and potential litigation and claims;

•  performing analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected relationships that may indicate risks of material misstatement due to fraud;

•  reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance, reviewing internal audit reports and reviewing correspondence with HMRC; 

•  in addressing the risk of fraud in rebates in revenue agreements, we obtained an understanding of relevant controls of the group’s monitoring of rebate arrangements 
and testing key customer contracts in each brands, as well as a sample of credit notes, to determine if there were any rebate type arrangements which were not 
appropriately accounted for or disclosed to group; and

•  in addressing the risk of fraud through management override of controls, testing the appropriateness of journal entries and other adjustments; assessing whether 
the judgements made in making accounting estimates are indicative of a potential bias; and evaluating the business rationale of any significant transactions that are 
unusual or outside the normal course of business.

We also communicated relevant identified laws and regulations and potential fraud risks to all engagement team members including internal specialists, and remained 
alert to any indications of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations throughout the audit.

73

Financial statementsIndependent auditors’ report continued
to the members of Next Fifteen Communications Group plc

12. Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:

•  the information given in the strategic report and the directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the 

financial statements; and

•  the strategic report and the directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and the parent company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified 
any material misstatements in the strategic report or the directors’ report.

13 Matters on which we are required to report by exception
13.1 Adequacy of explanations received and accounting records

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received 

from branches not visited by us; or

•  the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.

We have nothing to report 
in respect of these 
matters.

13.2 Directors’ remuneration

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our opinion certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration have not 
been made.

We have nothing to report 
in respect of these 
matters.

74

Financial statements14. Use of our report
This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been 
undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the 
fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the company and the company’s members as a body, for our audit work, 
for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Peter McDermott (Senior statutory auditor)
For and on behalf of Deloitte LLP
Statutory Auditor
London, United Kingdom
12 April 2021

75

Financial statementsConsolidated income statement
for the year ended 31 January 2021 and the year ended 31 January 2020

Revenue
Direct costs

Net revenue
Staff costs
Depreciation
Amortisation 
Other operating charges

Total operating charges

Operating profit

Finance expense
Finance income

Net finance expense

Share of profit from associate

(Loss)/profit before income tax
Income tax expense

(Loss)/profit for the year

Attributable to:
Owners of the Parent
Non-controlling interests

(Loss)/earnings per share
Basic (pence)
Diluted (pence)

Note

2

3
4,12,16
4,11

2,5

6
7

5
8

10
10

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

189,530
11,609
16,394
35,665

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

171,180
13,196
13,211
31,469

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

323,668
(56,782)

266,886

(253,198)

13,688

(16,884)
1,459

(15,425)

431

(1,306)
(2,643)

(3,949)

(4,938)
989

(3,949)

(5.5)
(5.3)

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000 

300,711
(52,242)

248,469

(229,056)

19,413

(16,672)
2,611

(14,061)

204

5,556
(2,717)

2,839

2,262
577

2,839

2.7
2.5

The accompanying notes are an integral part of this Consolidated Income Statement.

All results relate to continuing operations.

76

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(Loss)/profit for the year

Other comprehensive (expense)/income:
Items that will not be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss:
Fair value loss on investments in equity instruments designated as fair value through other 
comprehensive income

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss:
Exchange differences on translating foreign operations 
Loss arising on hedging instruments designated in hedges of the net assets in foreign operation

Total other comprehensive expense for the year

Total comprehensive (expense)/income for the year 

Total comprehensive (expense)/income attributable to:
Owners of the Parent
Non-controlling interests

The accompanying notes are an integral part of this Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income.

All results relate to continuing operations.

Note

19

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

(3,949)

(117)

(1,395)
—

(1,512)

(5,461)

(6,450)
989

(5,461)

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

2,839

(562)

(136)
(411)

(1,109)

1,730

1,153
577

1,730

77

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated balance sheet
as at 31 January 2021 and 31 January 2020

Assets
Property, plant and equipment
Right-of-use assets
Intangible assets
Investment in equity-accounted associate
Investments in financial assets
Deferred tax assets
Other receivables

Total non-current assets

Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Corporation tax asset

Total current assets

Total assets

Liabilities
Loans and borrowings
Deferred tax liabilities
Lease liabilities
Other payables
Provisions 
Contingent consideration
Share purchase obligation

Total non-current liabilities

Loans and borrowings
Trade and other payables
Lease liabilities
Provisions
Corporation tax liability
Deferred consideration
Contingent consideration
Share purchase obligation

Total current liabilities

Total liabilities

Total net assets

78

Note

12
16
11

18
13,19

13,19
19

19
18
16
14,19
15,19
17,19
17,19

19
14,19
16
15,19

17,19
17,19
17,19

31 January
2021
£’000

8,904
26,008
163,777
254
955
15,314
860

77,530
26,831
1,215

7,810
3,229
31,812
1,576
7,140
36,194
5,302

5,000
77,319
10,957
5,656
604
1,262
9,700
1,206

31 January
2020
£’000

14,224
41,655
155,408
232
1,075
10,967
809

70,260
28,661
734

33,007
3,538
43,023
16
4,942
26,815
2,098

5,000
59,620
11,210
1,522
1,173
2,715
15,366
1,269

31 January
2021
£’000

216,072

105,576

321,648

(93,063)

(111,704)

(204,767)

116,881

31 January
2020
£’000

224,370

99,655

324,025

(113,439)

(97,875)

(211,314)

112,711

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Equity
Share capital
Share premium reserve
Share purchase reserve
Foreign currency translation reserve
Other reserves
Retained earnings

Total equity attributable to owners of the 
Parent
Non-controlling interests

Total equity

Note

20

24

31 January
2021
£’000

2,274
92,408
(2,673)
6,166
608
18,174

31 January
2020
£’000

2,163
76,019
(2,673)
7,561
608
29,618

31 January
2021
£’000

116,957
(76)

116,881

31 January
2020
£’000

113,296
(585)

112,711

The accompanying notes are an integral part of this Consolidated Balance Sheet. 

These financial statements were approved and authorised by the Board on 12 April 2021.

Peter Harris
Chief Financial Officer

Company number 01579589

79

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity
for the year ended 31 January 2021 and the year ended 31 January 2020

At 1 February 2020

(Loss)/profit for the year
Other comprehensive expense for the 
year

Total comprehensive (expense)/income 
for the year

Shares issued on satisfaction of vested 
performance shares
Shares issued on acquisitions
Movement in relation to share-based 
payments
Tax on share-based payments
Movement due to ESOP share 
purchases
Movement due to ESOP share option 
exercises
Movement on reserves for 
non-controlling interests
Non-controlling dividend

Note

Share
capital
£’000

2,163

Share
premium
reserve
£’000

76,019

Share
purchase
reserve
£’000

(2,673)

—

—

—

69
42

—
—

—

—

—
—

—

—

—

10,162
6,227

—
—

—

—

—
—

—

—

—

—
—

—
—

—

—

—
—

20
20,26

8

 9

Foreign
currency
translation
reserve
£’000

7,561

—

(1,395)

(1,395)

—
—

—
—

—

—

—
—

Other
reserves ¹
£’000

608

—

—

—

—
—

—
—

(5)

5

—
—

Equity
attributable
to owners of
the Parent
£’000

113,296

(4,938)

Retained
earnings
£’000

29,618

(4,938)

Non-
controlling
interests
£’000

(585)

989

Total
equity
£’000

112,711

(3,949)

(117)

(1,512)

—

(1,512)

(5,055)

(6,450)

989

(5,461)

(10,231)
—

3,557
491

—

—

(206)
—

—
6,269

3,557
491

(5)

5

(206)
—

—
—

—
—

—

—

—
6,269

3,557
491

(5)

5

206
(686)

(76)

—
(686)

116,881

At 31 January 2021

2,274

92,408

(2,673)

6,166

608

18,174

116,957

1  Other reserves include the ESOP reserve, the treasury reserve, the merger reserve and the hedging reserve; see note 24.

80

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
Equity
attributable
to owners of
the Parent
£’000

Non-
controlling
interests
£’000

112,529

(1,076)

Total
equity
£’000

111,453

(1,794)

400

—

—

Share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
reserve
£’000

Share
purchase
reserve
£’000

Note

Foreign
currency
translation
reserve
£’000

At 31 January 2019 as previously stated

2,089

62,993

(2,673)

7,697

Change in accounting policy (IFRS 16)
Deferred tax on accounting policy change 
(IFRS 16)

At 1 February 2019

Profit for the year
Other comprehensive expense for the year

Total comprehensive (expense)/income for 
the year

Shares issued on satisfaction of vested 
performance shares
Shares issued on acquisitions
Movement in relation to share-based 
payments
Tax on share-based payments
Dividends to owners  
of the Parent
Movement due to ESOP share purchases
Movement due to ESOP share option 
exercises
Movement on reserves for non-controlling 
interests
Non-controlling dividend

20
20,26

8

9

9

—

—

—

—

—

—

2,089

62,993

(2,673)

—
—

—

38
36

—
—

—
—

—

—
—

—
—

—

5,388
7,638

—
—

—
—

—

—
—

—
—

—

—
—

—
—

—
—

—

—
—

Other
reserves ¹
£’000

1,019

—

—

1,019

—
(411)

Retained
earnings
£’000

41,404

(1,794)

400

40,010

2,262
(562)

—

—

7,697

—
(136)

(1,794)

400

111,135

2,262
(1,109)

(136)

(411)

1,700

1,513

—
—

—
—

—
—

—

—
—

—
—

—
—

—
(15)

15

—
—

(5,426)
—

600
167

(6,759)
—

—

(674)
—

—
7,674

600
167

(6,759)
(15)

15

(674)
—

At 31 January 2020

2,163

76,019

(2,673)

7,561

608

29,618

113,296

1  Other reserves include the ESOP reserve, the treasury reserve, the merger reserve and the hedging reserve; see note 24.

The accompanying notes are an integral part of this Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity.

(1,076)

110,059

577
—

577

—
—

—
—

—
—

—

674
(760)

(585)

2,839
(1,109)

1,730

—
7,674

600
167

(6,759)
(15)

15

—
(760)

112,711

81

Financial statementsConsolidated statement of cash flow
for the year ended 31 January 2021 and the year ended 31 January 2020

Note

4,12
16
4,11
6
7

4
4
8

26

Cash flows from operating activities
(Loss)/profit for the year
Adjustments for:
Depreciation
Right-of-use depreciation
Amortisation 
Finance expense
Finance income
Share of profit from equity-accounted associate
Impairment of right-of-use assets
Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment
(Gain)/loss on exit of finance lease
Income tax expense
Employment linked acquisition provision charge¹
Share-based payment charge

Net cash inflow from operating activities before 
changes in working capital
Change in trade and other receivables
Change in trade and other payables
Movement in provisions

Change in working capital

Net cash generated from operations
Income taxes paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities
Cash flows from investing activities
Acquisition of subsidiaries trade and assets, net of 
cash acquired
Payment of contingent consideration 
Purchases of equity instruments designated 
at FVTOCI 
Acquisition of property, plant and equipment
Proceeds on disposal of property, plant 
and equipment

82

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

(3,949)

3,880
7,729
16,394
16,884
(1,459)
(431)
8,503
6,885
(2,327)
2,643
8,041
3,587

(5,692)
12,942
(697)

(8,097)
(15,539)

—
(1,998)

4

66,380

6,553

72,933
(8,423)

64,510

2,839

4,505
8,691
13,211
16,672
(2,611)
(204)
—
1,360
14
2,717
5,029
600

1,971
(1,950)
(3,343)

(18,501)
(5,622)

(50)
(3,460)

23

52,823

(3,322)

49,501
(5,993)

43,508

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Proceeds on disposal of subsidiary
Acquisition of intangible assets
Net movement in long-term cash deposits
Income from finance lease receivables
Interest received

Net cash outflow from investing activities

Net cash inflow from operating and investing 
activities
Cash flows from financing activities
Repayment of lease liabilities
Increase in bank borrowings and overdrafts
Repayment of bank borrowings and overdrafts
Interest paid
Dividend and profit share paid to non-controlling 
interest partners
Dividend paid to shareholders of the Parent

Net cash outflow from financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash 
equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year
Exchange loss on cash held

Cash and cash equivalents at end of the year

Note

7

6

9
9

9

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

466
(1,831)
(24)
547
112

(11,367)
27,045
(14,006)
(979)

(760)
(6,759)

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

—
(2,109)
(82)
780
47

(12,647)
—
(24,912)
(881)

(686)
—

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

(26,994)

37,516

(39,126)

(1,610)

28,661
(220)

26,831

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

(28,340)

15,168

(6,826)

8,342

20,501
(182)

28,661

1 

 In the current year, we have reclassified the employment linked acquisition provision charge within the statement of cash flow to better reflect that it is a material non-cash movement. Previously the charge was classified 
as an item within the movement on provisions and therefore the prior year charge has also been reclassified to aid comparability year on year. 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of this Consolidated Statement of Cash Flow.

83

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the accounts
for the year ended 31 January 2021

1 Accounting policies
Next Fifteen Communications Group plc (the ‘Company’) is a public limited company incorporated and registered in England and Wales. The consolidated financial 
statements include the Company and its subsidiaries (together, the ‘Group’) and its interests in associates.

The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements are set out below. These policies have been consistently applied 
to all the periods presented, unless otherwise stated.

A. Basis of preparation
The Group’s financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, International Accounting Standards and Interpretations  
(‘Adopted IFRSs’) and the parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to companies reporting under Adopted IFRSs. These financial statements are presented in 
pounds sterling because that is the currency of the primary economic environment in which the Group operates.

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis (as set out in the corporate governance report) and on a historical cost basis, 
except for the remeasurement to fair value of certain financial assets and liabilities as described in the accounting policies below.

B. New and amended standards adopted by the Group
The Group has adopted the new accounting pronouncements which became effective this year, none of which had a material impact on the Group’s results or 
financial position. 

C. Basis of consolidation
The Group’s financial statements consolidate the results of Next Fifteen Communications Group plc and all of its subsidiary undertakings, and its interests in associates. 

Subsidiaries are all entities over which the Group has control. Control is achieved where the Company has existing rights that give it the ability to direct the activities 
that affect the Company’s returns and exposure or rights to variable returns from the entity. The existence and effect of potential voting rights that are currently exercisable 
or convertible are considered when assessing whether the Group controls another entity.

In the Consolidated Balance Sheet, the acquiree’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities are initially recognised at their fair values at the acquisition 
date. The results of acquired operations are included in the Consolidated Income Statement from the date on which control is obtained.

Non-controlling interests in the net assets of consolidated subsidiaries are identified separately from the Parent’s ownership interests in them. On an acquisition-by-acquisition 
basis, the Group recognises any non-controlling interest in the acquiree either at fair value or at the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquiree’s net 
assets. Each of these approaches has been used by the Group. Non-controlling interests are subsequently measured as the amount of those non-controlling interests 
at the date of the original combination and the non-controlling interest’s share of changes in equity since the date of the combination. 

An associate is an entity in which the Group has significant influence and which is neither a subsidiary nor a joint venture. Associates are accounted for under the equity 
method of accounting. The Consolidated Income Statement reflects the share of the results of the operations of the associate after tax. 

84

Financial statements1 Accounting policies continued
C. Basis of consolidation continued
When a business combination is achieved in stages, the Group’s previously held interests in the acquired entity are remeasured to its acquisition date fair value and 
the resulting gain or loss, if any, is recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement. Amounts arising from interests in the acquiree prior to the acquisition date that 
have previously been recognised in other comprehensive income are reclassified to the Consolidated Income Statement, where such treatment would be appropriate 
if that interest were disposed of.

If the initial accounting for a business combination is incomplete by the end of the reporting period in which the combination occurs, the Group reports provisional 
amounts for the items for which the accounting is incomplete.

Intercompany transactions, balances and unrealised gains on transactions between Group companies (Next Fifteen Communications Group plc and its subsidiaries) 
are eliminated. Unrealised losses are also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence of an impairment of the asset transferred. Accounting policies for 
subsidiaries have been changed where necessary to ensure consistency with the policies adopted by the Group.

D. Merger reserve (included in other reserves)
Where the conditions set out in section 612 of the Companies Act 2006 or equivalent sections of previous Companies Acts are met, shares issued as part of the 
consideration in a business combination are measured at their fair value in the Consolidated Balance Sheet, and the difference between the nominal value and fair 
value of the shares issued is recognised in the merger reserve.

E. Revenue and other income
Billings represent amounts receivable from clients, exclusive of VAT, sales taxes and trade discounts in respect of charges for fees, commission and rechargeable 
expenses incurred on behalf of clients.

Revenue comprises commission and fees earned and is recognised when a performance obligation is satisfied, in accordance with the terms of the contractual agreement. 
Typically, performance obligations are satisfied over time as services are rendered. Payment terms across the Group vary, but the Group is generally paid in arrears for 
its services and payment is typically due between 60 and 90 days.

Revenue recognised over time is based on the proportion of the level of service performed. Either an input method or an output method, depending on the particular 
arrangement, is used to measure progress for each performance obligation. In the majority of cases, relevant output measures such as the completion of project 
milestones set out in the contract are used to assess proportional performance. Where this is not the case then an input method based on costs incurred to date is 
used to measure performance. The primary input of substantially all work performed is represented by labour. As a result of the relationship between labour and cost 
there is normally a direct correlation between costs incurred and the proportion of the contract performed to date. 

85

Financial statements1 Accounting policies continued
E. Revenue and other income continued
The amount of revenue recognised depends on whether we act as an agent or as a principal. The Group acts as principal when we control the specified good or 
service prior to transfer. When the Group acts as a principal the revenue recorded is the gross amount billed. Out-of-pocket costs such as travel are also recognised 
at the gross amount billed with a corresponding amount recorded as a direct cost. Certain other arrangements with our clients are such that our responsibility is to 
arrange for a third party to provide a specified good or service to the client. In these cases, we are acting as an agent and we do not control the relevant good or 
service before it is transferred to the client. When the Group is acting as an agent, the revenue is recorded at the net amount retained. There is deemed to be no 
significant judgements in applying IFRS 15 and in evaluating when customers obtain control of the promised goods or services. 

Direct costs comprise fees paid to external suppliers when they are engaged to perform part or all of a specific project and are charged directly to clients but where 
the Group retains quality control oversight, such as production or research costs.

Further details on revenue recognition in terms of the nature of contractual agreements are as follows: 

•  retainer fees relate to arrangements whereby we have an obligation to perform services to the customer on an ongoing basis over the life of the contract. In these 

instances, revenue is recognised using a time-based method resulting in straight-line revenue recognition;

•  where project fees relate to assignments carried out under contractual terms which entitle the Group to payment for its performance to date in the event of contract 
termination, then fees are recognised over the period of the relevant assignments. Revenue is typically recognised in line with the value delivered to the customer 
which is the amount assigned to the project milestones completed set out in the contract. Where this is not the case then an input method based on costs incurred 
is used; and

•  revenue can be derived from media placements, for which the revenue for commissions on purchased media is typically recognised at the point in time the media 

is run. 

The Group has variable incentive-based revenue, typically in the form of volume based rebates provided to certain clients. The variable consideration is estimated 
using the most likely amount and is included in revenue to the amount that is highly probably not to result in a significant reversal of the cumulative revenue 
recognised.

Accrued and deferred income
Accrued income is a contract asset and is recognised when a performance obligation has been satisfied but has not yet been billed. Contract assets are transferred 
to receivables when the right to consideration is unconditional and billed per the terms of the contractual agreement.

In certain cases, payments are received from customers prior to satisfaction of performance obligations and recognised as deferred income on the Group’s balance 
sheet. These balances are considered contract liabilities and are typically related to prepayments for third-party expenses that are incurred shortly after billing. 

Finance income
Finance income primarily relates to changes in estimate in the Group’s contingent consideration and share purchase obligation liabilities; refer to section T.

86

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements1 Accounting policies continued
F. Intangible assets
Goodwill 
Goodwill represents the excess of the fair value of consideration payable, the amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree and the acquisition date fair value 
of any previous equity interest in the acquiree, over the fair value of the Group’s share of the identifiable net assets acquired. The fair value of consideration payable 
includes assets transferred, liabilities assumed and equity instruments issued. The amount relating to the non-controlling interest is measured on a transaction-by-
transaction basis, at either fair value or the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of net assets acquired. Both approaches have been used by the Group. 
Goodwill is capitalised as an intangible asset, not amortised but reviewed annually for impairment or in any period in which events or changes in circumstances indicate 
the carrying value may not be recoverable. Any impairment in carrying value is charged to the Consolidated Income Statement.

Costs associated with business combinations are recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement within the ‘other operating charges’ line in the year in which they 
are incurred. Those costs, which are directly attributable to the business combination, are excluded from underlying performance as they would not have been incurred 
had the business combination not occurred and a higher or lower spend has no relation on the underlying organic business. They do not relate to the underlying trading 
of the Group and are added back in the adjusted performance measures to aid comparability of the Group’s profitability year on year.

Software
Licences for software that are not integral to the functioning of a computer are capitalised as intangible assets. Costs that are directly associated with the production 
of identifiable and unique software products controlled by the Group, and that are expected to generate economic benefits exceeding costs beyond one year, are 
recognised as intangible assets. Direct costs include software development and employee costs. Amortisation is provided on software at rates calculated to write off 
the cost of each asset evenly over its expected useful life of between two and four years. Costs associated with maintaining computer software programs are recognised 
as an expense as they are incurred. No amortisation is charged on assets in the course of construction until they are available for operational use in the business. 

Software acquired as part of a business combination is recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. Software has a finite useful life and is amortised using the 
straight-line method over its estimated useful life of two to four years. 

Trade names
Trade names acquired in a business combination are recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. Trade names have a finite useful life and are carried at cost less 
accumulated amortisation. Amortisation is calculated using the straight-line method to allocate the cost of trade names over their estimated useful lives of up to 20 years. 

Customer relationships 
Contractual customer relationships acquired in a business combination are recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. The contractual customer relationships have 
a finite useful life and are carried at cost less accumulated amortisation. Amortisation is calculated using the straight-line method over the expected life of the customer 
relationship of five to six years.

Non-compete 
Certain acquisition agreements contain non-compete arrangements restricting the vendor’s ability to compete with the acquiring business during an earn-out period. 
The non-compete arrangements have a finite useful life equivalent to the length of the earn-out period and are carried at cost less accumulated amortisation. Amortisation 
is calculated using the straight-line method over the length of the arrangement.

The amortisation of acquired intangibles recognised as a result of IFRS 3 is added back in for the Group’s adjusted performance measures to aid comparability with its 
peer Group and to enhance comparability of the Group’s profitability year on year. 

87

Financial statements1 Accounting policies continued
G. Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost, net of depreciation. Depreciation is provided on all property, plant and equipment at annual rates calculated to write 
off the cost, less estimated residual value, of each asset evenly over its expected useful life as follows:

Short leasehold improvements  –  Over the term of the lease

Office equipment 

–  20% to 50% per annum straight-line basis

Office furniture 

Motor vehicles 

–  20% per annum straight-line basis

–  25% per annum straight-line basis

H. Impairment
Impairment tests on goodwill are undertaken annually at the financial year end. Other non-financial assets (excluding deferred tax) are subject to impairment tests 
whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that their carrying amount may not be recoverable.

Where the carrying value of an asset exceeds its recoverable amount, which is measured as the higher of value in use and fair value less costs to sell, the asset is 
impaired accordingly.

Where it is not possible to estimate the recoverable amount of an individual asset, the impairment test is carried out on the asset’s cash-generating unit, defined as the 
lowest group of assets in which the asset belongs for which there are separately identifiable cash flows. Goodwill is allocated on initial recognition to each of the Group’s 
cash-generating units that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination giving rise to the goodwill. The cash-generating units represent the lowest 
level within the entity at which the goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes.

Impairment charges are included within the amortisation and impairment line of the Consolidated Income Statement unless they reverse gains previously recognised 
in other comprehensive income. An impairment loss recognised for goodwill is not reversed.

I. Foreign currency
Transactions entered into by Group entities in a currency other than the currency of the primary economic environment in which they operate (their ‘functional currency’) 
are recorded at the exchange rates ruling when the transactions occur. Foreign currency monetary assets and liabilities are translated at the exchange rates ruling at 
the balance sheet date. Exchange differences arising on the retranslation of unsettled monetary assets and liabilities are recognised immediately in the Consolidated 
Income Statement. In the consolidated financial statements, foreign exchange movements on intercompany loans with indefinite terms, for which there is no expectation 
of a demand for repayment, are recognised directly in equity within a separate foreign currency translation reserve.

On consolidation, the results of overseas operations are translated into sterling at the average exchange rates for the accounting period. 

All assets and liabilities of overseas operations, including goodwill arising on the acquisition of those operations, are translated at the exchange rates ruling at the 
balance sheet date. Exchange differences arising on translating the opening net assets at opening rates and the results of overseas operations at average rates are 
recognised directly in the foreign currency translation reserve within equity. The effective portion arising on the retranslation of foreign currency borrowings which are 
designated as a qualifying hedge is recognised within equity. See note 19 for more detail on hedging activities. 

On disposal of a foreign operation, the cumulative translation differences recognised in the foreign currency translation reserve relating to that operation up to the date 
of disposal are transferred to the Consolidated Income Statement as part of the profit or loss on disposal.

88

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements1 Accounting policies continued
I. Foreign currency continued
On a reduction of ownership interest in a subsidiary that does not affect control, the cumulative retranslation difference is only allocated to the non-controlling interests 
(‘NCI’) and not recycled through the Consolidated Income Statement.

J. Operating segments
Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the chief operating decision-maker. The chief operating decision-maker, 
who is responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments, has been identified as the Board of Directors. 

K. Financial instruments
Financial assets and liabilities are recognised on the Group’s Consolidated Balance Sheet when the Group becomes party to the contractual provisions of the asset or 
liability. The Group’s accounting policies for different types of financial asset and liability are described below.

Financial assets and financial liabilities are initially measured at fair value. Transaction costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition or issue of financial assets 
and financial liabilities (other than financial assets and financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss) are added to or deducted from the fair value of the financial 
assets or financial liabilities, as appropriate, on initial recognition. Transaction costs directly attributable to the acquisition of financial assets or financial liabilities at fair 
value through profit or loss are recognised immediately in profit or loss.

Trade receivables 
All trade receivables held by the Group are financial assets held within a business model whose objective is to hold financial assets in order to collect the contractual 
cash flows. Trade receivables are initially recognised at fair value and will subsequently be measured at amortised cost less allowances for impairment. 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash in hand and short-term call deposits held with banks, with whom we determine there is a low credit risk. Bank overdrafts are 
shown within loans and borrowings in current liabilities on the Consolidated Balance Sheet, except where there is a pooling arrangement with a bank that allows them 
to be offset against cash balances. In such cases the net cash balance will be shown within cash and cash equivalents in the Consolidated Balance Sheet. 

Impairment of financial assets
The Group recognises a loss allowance for expected credit losses on trade receivables and contract assets. The amount of expected credit losses is updated at each 
reporting date to reflect changes in credit risk since initial recognition of the respective financial instrument. The Group always recognises lifetime ECL for trade 
receivables and contract assets. The expected credit losses on these financial assets are estimated using a provision matrix based on the Group’s historical credit loss 
experience, adjusted for factors that are specific to the debtors. 

Such provisions are recorded in a separate allowance account, with the loss being recognised as an expense in the other operating charges line in the Consolidated 
Income Statement. 

Contingent consideration 
On initial recognition, the liability for contingent consideration relating to acquisitions is measured at fair value. The liability is calculated based on the present value of 
the ultimate expected payment with the corresponding debit included within goodwill. Subsequent movements in the present value of the ultimate expected payment 
are recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement within finance income/expense.

The Group has a portion of consideration which is payable subject to continuing employment of the previous owner within the Group. The expected liability is recognised 
within operating costs evenly over the required employment term of the seller and is separately recognised as an employment-related acquisition payment provision.

89

Financial statements1 Accounting policies continued
K. Financial instruments continued
Share purchase obligation 
Put-option agreements that allow the non-controlling interest shareholders in the Group’s subsidiary undertakings to require the Group to purchase the non-controlling 
interest are recorded in the Consolidated Balance Sheet as liabilities. On initial recognition, the liability is measured at fair value and is calculated based on the present 
value of the ultimate expected payment with the corresponding debit included in the share purchase reserve. Subsequent movements in the present value of the 
ultimate expected payment are recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement within finance income/expense.

The Group adjusts for the remeasurement of the acquisition-related liabilities within the adjusted performance measures in order to aid comparability of the Group’s 
results year on year as the charge/credit can vary significantly depending on the underlying brand’s performance. 

Trade payables 
Trade payables are initially recognised at fair value and thereafter at amortised cost.

Bank borrowing
Interest-bearing bank loans and overdrafts are recognised at their fair value, net of direct issue costs and, thereafter, at amortised cost. Finance costs are charged to 
the Consolidated Income Statement over the term of the debt so that the amount charged is at a constant rate on the carrying amount. Finance costs include issue 
costs that are initially recognised as a reduction in the proceeds of the associated capital instrument.

Hedging activities 
The Group designates certain derivatives as hedging instruments in respect of hedges of net investments in foreign operations. The Group has chosen to continue to 
account for these under IAS 39 as allowed by the transition provisions for IFRS 9. 

The Group documents, at the inception of the transaction, the relationship between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management objectives 
and strategy for undertaking various hedging transactions. The Group also documents its assessment, both at hedge inception and on an ongoing basis, of whether 
the hedging instruments used in hedging transactions are highly effective in offsetting changes in fair values of hedged items.

Where a foreign currency loan is designated as a qualifying hedge of the foreign exchange exposure arising on retranslation of the net assets of a foreign operation, 
any gain or loss on the hedging instrument relating to the effective portion of the hedge is recognised in other comprehensive income in a separate hedging reserve 
included within other reserves. This offsets the foreign exchange differences arising on the retranslation of the foreign operation’s net assets, which are recognised in 
the separate foreign currency translation reserve. The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the Consolidated Income Statement 
within finance income/expense.

Gains and losses accumulated in equity on retranslation of the foreign currency loans are recycled through the Consolidated Income Statement when the foreign 
operation is sold or is partially disposed of so that there is a loss of control. At this point the cumulative foreign exchange differences arising on the retranslation of the 
net assets of the foreign operation are similarly recycled through the Consolidated Income Statement. Where the hedging relationship ceases to qualify for hedge 
accounting, the cumulative gains and losses remain within the foreign currency translation reserve until control of the foreign operation is lost; subsequent gains and 
losses on the hedging instrument are recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement. 

Where there is a change in the ownership interest without effecting control, the exchange differences are adjusted within reserves.

90

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements1 Accounting policies continued
L. Provisions 
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation as a result of a past event and it is probable that the Group will be required to settle that obligation, 
and are discounted to present value where the effect is material. Provisions are created for acquisition-related payments linked to the continuing employment of the 
sellers and is recognised over the required period of employment. Provisions comprise liabilities where there is uncertainty about the timing of the settlement and are 
measured at the present value of the Group’s best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the present obligation at the balance sheet date. 

M. Retirement benefits
Pension costs which relate to payments made by the Group to employees’ own defined contribution pension plans are charged to the Consolidated Income Statement 
as incurred.

N. Share-based payments
The Group issues equity-settled share-based payments to certain employees via the Group’s Long-Term Incentive Plan. The share-based payments are measured at 
fair value at the date of the grant and expensed on a straight-line basis over the vesting period. The cumulative expense is adjusted for failure to achieve non-market 
performance vesting conditions.

Fair value is measured by use a Black-Scholes model on the grounds that there are no market-related vesting conditions. The expected life used in the model has been 
adjusted, based on the Board’s best estimate, for the effects of non-transferability, exercise restrictions and behavioural considerations.

The Group grants brand equity appreciation rights to key individuals in the form of LLC units or restricted Ordinary Shares in the relevant subsidiary. The LLC units or 
restricted Ordinary Shares give the individuals a right to a percentage of the future appreciation in their particular brand’s equity. Appreciation is measured based on 
a multiple of the brand’s operating earnings in subsequent year(s), over the base line value determined at the date of grant. Since any brand appreciation payments 
are to be settled in Group equity, they are accounted for as equity-settled share-based payments. The value is recognised as a one-off share-based payment in the 
income statement in the year of grant as the agreements do not include service requirements, thus the cost accounting is not aligned with the timing of the anticipated 
benefit of the incentive, namely the growth of the relevant brands. Therefore, adjusting for these within the Group’s adjusted performance measures gives a better 
reflection of the Group’s performance and enhances comparability year on year.

O. Leased assets
The Group leases various assets, comprising mostly of properties and office equipment. The Group assesses whether a contract is or contains a lease, at inception of 
a contract, based on whether the contract conveys the right to control the use of an identified asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration. The Group 
recognises a right-of-use asset and a corresponding lease liability at the commencement date with respect to all lease agreements in which it is the lessee, except for 
short-term leases (defined as leases with a lease term of 12 months or less) and leases of low-value assets, where the Group has elected to use the exemption. The 
total rentals payable under these leases are charged to the Consolidated Income Statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term.

The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the lease payments not paid at the commencement date, discounted using the interest rate implicit in the 
lease. When this rate cannot be determined, the Group uses the incremental borrowing rate for the same term as the underlying lease. Lease payments comprise fixed 
payments less any lease incentives receivable and variable lease payments as at the commencement date. The lease liability is subsequently remeasured when there 
is a change in future lease payments due to a renegotiation or market rent review, or a reassessment of the lease term. Lease modifications result in remeasurement 
of the lease liability with a corresponding adjustment to the related right-of-use asset. Interest expense is included within finance expense in the Consolidated Income 
Statement. The right-of-use asset is initially measured based on the lease liability adjusted for any lease payments made at or before the commencement date, plus 
any initial direct costs incurred, less any lease incentives received, plus the estimated cost for any restoration costs the Group is obligated to at lease inception. Right-of-use 
assets are subsequently measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. They are depreciated on a straight-line basis over the shorter of the 
lease term or the useful life of the asset. 

91

Financial statements1 Accounting policies continued
O. Leased assets continued
At times, entities of the Group will sublet certain of their properties when underlying business requirements change. The Group assesses the classification of these 
subleases with reference to the right-of-use asset, not the underlying asset. As a result, certain subleases are classified as finance leases and a sublease receivable is 
recognised and recorded as a financial asset within trade and other receivables on the Consolidated Balance Sheet and any relating right-of-use asset is derecognised.

When the Group acts as an intermediate lessor it accounts for the head lease and the sublease separately. Whenever the terms of the lease transfer substantially all 
the risks and rewards of ownership in relation to the underlying asset to the lessee, the contract is classified as a finance lease. All other leases are classified as operating 
leases. Amounts due from lessees under finance leases are recognised as finance lease receivables at the amount of the Group’s net investment in the leases using 
the effective interest rate method. The Group recognises lessor payments under operating leases as income on a straight-line basis over the lease term. 

P. Current tax
The tax currently payable is based on taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from net profit as reported in the Consolidated Income Statement because it 
excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible in other years and it further excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. The Group’s liability 
for current tax is calculated using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.

Q. Deferred tax
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognised where the carrying amount of an asset or liability in the Consolidated Balance Sheet differs from its tax base, except 
for differences arising on:

•  the initial recognition of goodwill;

•  the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction which is not a business combination and at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor 

taxable profit; and

•  investments in subsidiaries and jointly controlled entities where the Group is able to control the timing of the reversal of the difference and it is probable that the 

difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

Recognition of deferred tax assets is restricted to those instances where it is probable that taxable profit will be available against which the asset can be utilised.

The amount of the asset or liability is determined using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date and are expected to apply 
when the deferred tax liabilities/(assets) are settled/(recovered).

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when the Group has a legally enforceable right to offset current tax assets and liabilities and the deferred tax assets and 
liabilities relate to taxes levied by the same tax authority on either:

•  the same taxable Group company; or

•  different Group entities which intend either to settle current tax assets and liabilities on a net basis, or to realise the assets and settle the liabilities simultaneously, in 

each future period in which significant amounts of deferred tax assets or liabilities are expected to be settled or recovered.

92

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements1 Accounting policies continued
Q. Deferred tax continued
Where a temporary difference arises between the tax base of employee share options and their carrying value, a deferred tax asset should arise. To the extent that the 
future tax deduction exceeds the related cumulative IFRS 2 ‘Share-Based Payment’ (‘IFRS 2’) expense, the excess of the associated deferred tax balance is recognised 
directly in equity. To the extent that the future tax deduction matches the cumulative IFRS 2 expense, the associated deferred tax balance is recognised in the 
Consolidated Income Statement.

R. Dividends
Equity dividends are recognised when they become legally payable. Interim equity dividends are recognised when paid. Final equity dividends are recognised when 
approved by the shareholders at an Annual General Meeting.

S. Employee Share Ownership Plan (‘ESOP’)
As the Group is deemed to have control of its ESOP trust, the trust is treated as a subsidiary and is consolidated for the purposes of the Group accounts. The ESOP’s 
assets (other than investments in the Company’s shares), liabilities, income and expenses are included on a line-by-line basis in the Group financial statements. The 
ESOP’s investment in the Group’s shares is deducted from equity in the Consolidated Balance Sheet as if they were treasury shares and presented in the ESOP reserve.

T. Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty
Critical judgements in applying the Group’s accounting policies
The following are the critical judgements, apart from those involving estimations (which are dealt with separately below), that the Directors have made in the process 
of applying the Group’s accounting policies and that have the most significant effect on the amounts recognised in financial statements. 

I. Identification of acquired intangible assets
As part of the acquisition accounting under IFRS 3, the Group must identify and value the intangibles it has acquired. The identification of the intangibles acquired, such 
as customer relationships, intellectual property, non-compete agreements and brand names, requires judgement following an assessment of the acquired business. 
This involves reviewing the past performance of the acquiree and future forecasts to ascertain the intangible assets which the purchase price should be allocated to.

II. Identification of adjusting items
The identification of adjusting items is a judgement in terms of which costs or credits are not associated with the underlying trading of the business or otherwise impact 
the comparability of the Group’s results year on year. Adjusting items for the Group include amortisation of acquired intangibles, the change in estimate and unwinding 
of discount on acquisition-related liabilities, deal costs, growth share charges, employment-related acquisition costs, restructuring costs, UK furlough grant and 
property impairment.

93

Financial statements1 Accounting policies continued
T. Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty continued
Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The key assumptions concerning the future, and other key sources of estimation uncertainty at the reporting period that may have a significant risk of causing a material 
adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year, are discussed below.

I. Impairment of goodwill
In line with lAS 36 ‘Impairment of Assets’, the Group is required to test the carrying value of goodwill, at least annually, for impairment. As part of this review process 
the recoverable amount of the goodwill is determined using value-in-use calculations, which requires estimates of future cash flows and as such is subject to estimates 
and assumptions around revenue and cost growth rates from the Board-approved budget and discount rates applied. Further details are contained in note 11.

The Group has performed sensitivity analysis on the assumptions used in the value-in-use calculations for the purposes of the goodwill impairment review. The Group 
performed two scenarios. Firstly, with all other variables unchanged, if revenue and costs do not grow past the FY22 budget, and there is no growth in perpetuity, no 
impairment would be required. Secondly, with all other variables unchanged, if the discount rate increased by 5% to 17.7%, no impairment would be required. 

II. Contingent consideration, share purchase obligation and valuation of put options
Contingent consideration and share purchase obligations relating to acquisitions have been included based on discounted management estimates of the most likely 
outcome. The difference between the fair value of the liabilities and the actual amounts payable is charged to the Consolidated Income Statement as notional finance 
costs over the life of the associated liability. Changes in the estimates of contingent consideration payable and the share purchase obligation are recognised in finance 
income/expense. These require judgements around future revenue growth, profit margins and discount rates, which, if incorrect, could result in a material adjustment 
to the value of these liabilities within the next financial year. Further details, including sensitivity analysis, are contained in note 17.

U. New standards and amendments not applied
The Group has not yet adopted certain new standards, amendments and interpretations to existing standards which have been published but are only effective for our 
accounting periods beginning on or after 1 February 2021 or later periods. These new pronouncements are listed below:

•  IFRS 17 ‘Insurance Contracts’; and

•  IFRS 10 ‘Consolidated Financial Statements’ and IAS 28 (amendments), Sale or Contribution of Assets between an Investor and its Associate or Joint Venture.

The Directors do not expect that the adoption of the standards listed above will have a material impact on the financial statements of the Group in future periods.

94

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements2 Segment information
Reportable segments
The Board of Directors has identified the operating segments based on the reports it reviews as the chief operating decision-maker (‘CODM’) to make strategic decisions, 
assess performance and allocate resources. These are deemed to be both regional and service segments. 

The Group’s business is separated into a number of brands which are considered to be the underlying cash-generating units (‘CGUs’). These brands are organised into 
service segments based on the work they do for their customers and into geographical segments based on where the brand is located; within these reportable segments 
the Group operates a number of separate businesses which generally offer complementary products and services to their customers. 

Measurement of operating segment profit 
The Board of Directors assesses the performance of the operating segments based on a measure of adjusted operating profit before intercompany recharges, which 
reflects the internal reporting measure used by the Board of Directors. This measurement basis excludes the effects of certain fair value accounting charges, amortisation 
of acquired intangibles and other costs not associated with the underlying business, details of which are included in this note. Other information provided to them is 
measured in a manner consistent with that in the financial statements. Head office costs relate to Group costs before allocation of intercompany charges to the operating 
segments. Inter-segment transactions have not been separately disclosed as they are not material. The Board of Directors does not review the assets and liabilities of 
the Group on a segmental basis and therefore this is not separately disclosed.

Year ended 31 January 2021
Revenue 
Net revenue
Segment adjusted operating profit/(loss) after interest on finance lease liabilities
Adjusted operating profit margin¹
Organic net revenue (decline)/growth

Year ended 31 January 2020
Revenue 
Net revenue
Segment adjusted operating profit/(loss) after interest on finance lease liabilities
Adjusted operating profit margin¹
Organic net revenue (decline)/growth

Brand
Marketing
£’000 

Data and
Analytics
£’000

Creative
Technology
£’000

Head office
£’000

Total
£’000

168,921
140,530
34,573
24.6%
(5.5)%

160,242
135,036
29,930
22.2%
(5.7)%

66,684
48,447
13,254
27.4%
8.2%

59,446
45,054
12,697
28.2%
19.3%

88,063
77,909
13,053
16.8%
(6.0)%

81,023
68,379
7,774
11.4%
(2.1)%

—
—
(11,394)
—
—

—
—
(9,541)
—
—

323,668
266,886
49,486
18.5%
(3.4)%

300,711
248,469
40,860
16.4%
(2.0)%

1  Adjusted operating profit margin is calculated based on the operating profit after interest on finance lease liabilities as a percentage of net revenue.

95

Financial statements2 Segment information continued
Measurement of operating segment profit continued

Year ended 31 January 2021
Revenue
Net revenue
Segment adjusted operating profit/(loss) after interest on finance lease 
liabilities
Adjusted operating profit margin¹
Organic net revenue decline

Year ended 31 January 2020
Revenue
Net revenue
Segment adjusted operating profit/(loss) after interest on finance lease 
liabilities
Adjusted operating profit margin¹
Organic net revenue growth/(decline)

UK
£’000 

126,811
106,247

22,402
21.1%
(6.4)%

119,551
97,377

20,094
20.6%
0.3%

EMEA
£’000

9,621
8,610

1,997
23.2%
(4.7)%

10,631
8,820

1,587
18.0%
0.4%

US
£’000

Asia Pacific
£’000

Head office
£’000

Total
£’000

170,467
138,383

34,150
24.7%
(0.8)%

153,481
127,563

26,421
20.7%
(4.6)%

16,769
13,646

2,331
17.1%
(5.5)%

17,048
14,709

2,299
15.6%
4.8%

—
—

323,668
266,886

(11,394)
—
—

—
—

(9,541)
—
—

49,486
18.5%
(3.4)%

300,711
248,469

40,860
16.4%
(2.0)%

1  Adjusted operating profit margin is calculated based on the operating profit after interest on finance lease liabilities as a percentage of net revenue.

96

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements2 Segment information continued
Measurement of operating segment profit continued
A reconciliation of segment adjusted operating profit to statutory operating profit is provided as follows:

Operating profit

Interest on finance lease liabilities

Operating profit after interest on finance lease liabilities

Share-based payment charge¹
Employment-related acquisition payments²
Deal costs³
Costs associated with restructuring⁴
UK furlough grant5
Property impairment6

Total adjusted costs in operating profit excluding amortisation
Amortisation of acquired intangibles7

Total adjusted costs in operating profit

Segment adjusted operating profit after interest on finance lease liabilities

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

13,688

(1,408)

12,280

2,424
8,041
371
2,746
(1,396)
10,018

22,204
15,002

37,206

49,486

19,413

(1,596)

17,817

374
5,029
945
4,596
—
—

10,944
12,099

23,043

40,860

1  

 This charge relates to transactions whereby a restricted grant of brand equity was given to key management in M Booth & Associates LLC, Twogether Creative Limited, Savanta Group Limited and ODD London Limited 
(2020: M Booth & Associates LLC) at nil cost which holds value in the form of access to future profit distributions as well as any future sale value under the performance-related mechanism set out in the share sale 
agreement. This value is recognised as an upfront share-based payment in the income statement in the year of grant as the agreements do not include service requirements, thus the cost accounting is not aligned with 
the timing of the anticipated benefit of the incentive, namely the growth of the relevant brands. It also includes £239,000 of charges associated with equity transactions accounted for as share-based payments. The Group 
determines that these brand appreciation rights (or growth shares) should be excluded from underlying performance as the cost accounting is not aligned to the timing of the anticipated benefit of the incentive, namely 
growth of the relevant brands.

2    This charge relates to payments linked to the continuing employment of the sellers which is being recognised over the required period of employment. Although these costs are not exceptional or non-recurring, the 
Group determines they should be excluded from the underlying performance, as the costs solely relate to acquiring the business. The sellers of the business are typically paid market rate salaries and bonuses in addition 
to these acquisition-related payments and therefore the Group determines these costs solely relate to acquiring the business. Adjusting for these within the Group’s adjusted performance measures gives a better reflection 
of the Group’s profitability and enhances comparability year-on-year. 

3    These costs are directly attributable to business combinations and are excluded from underlying performance as they would not have been incurred had the business combination not occurred. They do not relate to the 

underlying trading of the Group and are added back to aid comparability of the Group’s profitability year-on-year.

4    In the current year the Group has incurred restructuring costs which primarily relates to Covid-19 redundancy costs taken in the year in response to the pandemic in addition to writing off intangibles. These costs relate 
to these specific transformational events; they do not relate to underlying trading of the relevant brand and therefore have been added back to aid comparability of performance year on year. These costs are made up 
of £2.5m staff-related costs and £0.2m of other costs relating to the intangible write offs.

5    As a result of Covid-19, a number of the UK agencies received government support from the UK furlough scheme which has been accounted for as a reduction in staff costs. Subsequent to the balance sheet date, the 
Group has repaid all amounts received from the UK government. As a result of the receipt and repayment being accounted for in two separate years, the amounts received are added back to aid comparability of the 
Group’s profitability year-on-year.

97

Financial statements2 Segment information continued
Measurement of operating segment profit continued
6    In the current period the Group has recognised charges relating to the reorganisation of the property space across the Group. The majority of the charge is impairment of right-of-use assets and leasehold improvements. 
As a result of Covid-19, the Group has identified excess property space within the portfolio and therefore taken an impairment charge relating to those offices. The Group has adjusted for this cost, as the additional one-off 
impairment charge does not relate to the underlying trading of the business and therefore added back to aid comparability.

7    In line with its peer group, the Group adds back amortisation of acquired intangibles. Judgement is applied in the allocation of the purchase price between intangibles and goodwill, and in determining the useful economic 
lives of the acquired intangibles. The judgements made by the Group are inevitably different to those made by our peers and as such amortisation of acquired intangibles has been added back to aid comparability.

3 Employee information
Staff costs for all employees, including Directors, consist of:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Pension costs
Share-based payment charge (note 21)

The average monthly number of employees during the period, by geographical location, was as follows:

UK
Europe and Africa
US 
Asia Pacific
Head office

Key management personnel are considered to be the Board of Directors as set out on pages 24 and 25. 

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

161,630
12,045
4,227
11,628

189,530

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

150,203
11,676
3,672
5,629

171,180

Year ended
31 January
2021

Year ended
31 January
2020

969
101
854
337
56

2,317

916
100
754
293
55

2,118

98

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements3 Employee information continued
Directors’ remuneration consists of:

Short-term employee benefits
Pension costs
Share-based payment charge

The highest paid Director received total emoluments of £756,000 (2020: £839,000).

4 Operating profit 
This is arrived at after charging/(crediting):

Depreciation of owned property, plant and equipment
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Amortisation of intangible assets
Impairment of right-of-use assets
Loss on sale and impairment of property, plant and equipment
Share-based payment charge
Share-based payment charge – adjusted (note 2)
Short-term sublease income
Short-term lease expense
Low-value lease expense
UK furlough grant - adjusted (note 2)
Other government grants
Foreign exchange loss

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

976
101
603

1,680

1,036
112
137

1,285

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

3,880
7,729
16,394
8,503
6,885
1,402
10,226
(453)
933
78
(1,396)
(748)
775

4,505
8,691
13,211
—
1,360
226
5,403
(487)
986
194
—
—
250

99

Financial statements4 Operating profit continued
Auditor’s remuneration
During the year the Group (including its overseas subsidiaries) obtained the following services from the Company’s auditor and their associates:

Fees payable to the Company’s auditor for the statutory audit of the Company accounts and consolidated annual statements
The auditing of financial statements of the subsidiaries pursuant to legislation
Non-audit services:
Tax advisory services
Other assurance services

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

320
107

—
5

432

300
111

21
5

437

5 Reconciliation of pro forma financial measures
The following reconciliations of pro forma financial measures have been presented to provide additional information which will be useful to the users of the financial 
statements in understanding the underlying performance of the Group.

The Group includes non-GAAP measures as they consider these measures to be both useful and necessary. They are used by the Group for internal performance 
analyses; the presentation of these measures facilitates comparability with other industry peers, although the Group’s measures may not be calculated in the same way 
as similarly titled measures reported by other companies. The adjusting items have been explained in note 2. 

The adjusted measures are also used for the performance calculation of the adjusted earnings per share used for the vesting of employee share options (note 10), 
banking covenants and cash flow analysis. 

100

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements 
 
 
5 Reconciliation of pro forma financial measures continued
Adjusted (loss)/profit before income tax and earnings to ordinary shareholders

(Loss)/profit before income tax
Unwinding of discount on contingent and deferred consideration (note 17)1
Unwinding of discount on share purchase obligation (note 17)1
Total adjusting items in operating profit (note 2)
Change in estimate of future contingent consideration payable (note 17)2
Change in estimate of future share purchase obligation (note 17)2

Adjusted profit before income tax

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

(1,306)
4,694
459
37,206
5,332
2,732

49,117

5,556
3,394
158
23,043
6,167
1,919

40,237

1 

2 

 The unwinding of discount on these liabilities is also excluded from underlying performance on the basis that it is non-cash and the balance is driven by the Group’s assessment of the time value of money and this 
exclusion ensures comparability.

 The Group adjusts for the remeasurement of the acquisition-related liabilities within the adjusted performance measures in order to aid comparability of the Group’s results year on year as the charge/credit from 
remeasurement can vary significantly depending on the underlying brand’s performance. It is non-cash and its directional impact to the income statement is opposite to the brand’s performance driving the valuations.

Adjusted EBITDA

Operating profit
Depreciation of owned property, plant and equipment (note 12)
Depreciation of right-of-use assets (note 16)
Amortisation of intangible assets (note 11)

EBITDA
Total adjusting items in operating profit excluding amortisation (note 2)

Adjusted EBITDA

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

13,688
3,880
7,729
16,394

41,691
22,204

63,895

19,413
4,505
8,691
13,211

45,820
10,944

56,764

101

Financial statements5 Reconciliation of pro forma financial measures continued
Adjusted staff costs

Staff costs
Reorganisation costs
UK furlough grant
Charges associated with equity transactions accounted for as share-based payments (note 2)
Employment-related acquisition payments (note 2)

Adjusted staff costs

6 Finance expense

Financial liabilities at amortised cost
Bank interest payable
Interest on lease liabilities

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit and loss
Unwinding of discount on share purchase obligation (note 17)
Change in estimate of future share purchase obligation (note 17)
Unwinding of discount on contingent and deferred consideration (note 17)
Change in estimate of future contingent consideration payable (note 17)

Other
Other interest payable

Finance expense

102

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

189,530
(2,458)
1,396
(2,185)
(8,041)

178,242

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

171,180
(2,880)
—
(374)
(5,029)

162,897

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

877
1,408

459
2,908
4,694
6,534

4

16,884

977
1,596

158
1,997
3,394
8,548

2

16,672

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
7 Finance income

Financial assets at amortised cost
Bank interest receivable
Finance lease interest receivable

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit and loss
Change in estimate of future share purchase obligation (note 17)
Change in estimate of future contingent consideration (note 17)

Other
Other interest receivable

Finance income

8 Taxation
The major components of income tax expense for the year ended 31 January 2021 and year ended 31 January 2020 are:

Consolidated Income Statement
Current income tax
Current income tax expense
Adjustments in respect of current income tax in prior years

Deferred income tax
Relating to the origination and reversal of temporary differences
Adjustments in respect of deferred tax for prior years

Income tax expense reported in the Consolidated Income Statement

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity
Tax credit relating to share-based remuneration

Income tax benefit reported in equity

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

43
34

176
1,202

4

1,459

99
40

78
2,381

13

2,611

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

8,472
(334)

(5,464)
(31)

2,643

(491)

(491)

6,244
(692)

(3,223)
388

2,717

(167)

(167)

103

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
8 Taxation continued
The tax assessed for the year is higher than the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19% (2020: 19%). The difference is explained below:

Factors affecting the tax charge for the year
(Loss)/profit before income tax

Corporation tax expense at 19% (2020: 19%) 
Effects of:
Disallowed expenses
Recognition of previously unrecognised tax losses
Non-utilisation of tax losses
Higher rates of tax on overseas earnings
Adjustments in respect of prior years

Reconciliation of tax expense in the Consolidated Income Statement to adjusted tax expense:
Income tax expense reported in the Consolidated Income Statement
Add back:
Tax on adjusting items
Costs associated with the current period restructure and office moves (note 2)
Unwinding of discount on and change in estimates of contingent and deferred consideration (note 17)
Share-based payment charge (note 2)
Amortisation of acquired intangibles
Employment-related acquisition liabilities

Adjusted tax expense

Adjusted profit before income tax (note 5)
Adjusted effective tax rate

104

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

(1,306)

(248)

2,947
—
4
305
(365)

2,643

5,556

1,056

1,775
(2)
3
189
(304)

2,717

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

2,643

2,717

1,965
1,956
141
3,196
21

9,922

49,117
20%

912
2,104
(198)
2,492
19

8,046

40,237
20%

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
8 Taxation continued
The Group presents the adjusted effective tax rate to help users of this report better understand its tax charge. In arriving at this rate, the Group removes the tax effect 
of items which are adjusted for in arriving at the adjusted profit before income tax disclosed in note 5. The Group considers that the resulting adjusted effective tax 
rate is more representative of its tax payable position.

The income tax expense for the year is based on the UK effective statutory rate of corporation tax of 19% (2020: 19%). Overseas tax is calculated at the rates prevailing 
in the respective jurisdictions. In the Spring Budget 2021, the Government announced that from April 2023, the main rate of UK corporation tax will increase to 25%. 
As this new law has not been substantively enacted at the balance sheet date, its effects are not included in the financial statements. Deferred tax balances at 31 January 
2021 have been recognised at 19%, being the rate substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

Net corporation tax paid during the year totalled £8.4m (2020: £6m).

9 Dividend

Dividends paid during the year
Final dividend paid for prior year of £Nil per Ordinary Share (2020: 5.4p)
Interim dividend paid of £Nil per Ordinary Share (2020: 2.5p)

Non-controlling interest dividend1

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

—
—

—

686

4,595
2,164

6,759

760

1 

 During the year, a profit share was paid to the holders of the non-controlling interest of Blueshirt of £159,595 (2020: £153,706), Outcast of £196,152 (2020: £225,840), M Booth of £329,906 (2020: £291,887), Beyond of 
£Nil (2020: £81,556), and Connections Media of £Nil (2020: £7,181).

The ESOP waived its right to dividends in the financial years ended 31 January 2021 and 2020.

A final dividend of 7p per share has been proposed, which is a total amount of £6,368,808. This has not been accrued. In the prior year, given the macroeconomic 
backdrop due to Covid-19, the Group decided to suspend the final dividend. This makes the total dividend for the year 7p per share (2020: 2.5p). The final dividend, if 
approved at the AGM on 24 June 2021, will be paid on 13 August 2021 to all shareholders on the Register of Members as at 9 July 2021. The ex-dividend date for the 
shares is 8 July 2021. 

105

Financial statements 
 
 
10 Earnings per share
Adjusted and diluted adjusted earnings per share have been presented to provide additional useful information. The adjusted earnings per share is the performance 
measure used for the vesting of employee share options and performance shares. 

Earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders
Unwinding of discount on contingent and deferred consideration 
Unwinding of discount on share purchase obligation
Change in estimate of future contingent consideration payable 
Change in estimate of share purchase obligation
Costs associated with the current period restructure (note 2)
Share-based payment charge (note 2)
Property impairment (note 2)
Deal costs (note 2)
Employment-related acquisition payments (note 2)
UK furlough grant (note 2)
Amortisation of acquired intangibles
Tax effect of adjusting items above

Adjusted earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders

Weighted average number of Ordinary Shares
Dilutive LTIP shares
Dilutive growth deal shares1
Other potentially issuable shares

Diluted weighted average number of Ordinary Shares

Basic (loss)/earnings per share
Diluted (loss)/earnings per share

Adjusted earnings per share
Diluted adjusted earnings per share

1  This relates to the brand equity appreciation rights as discussed in note 1.

106

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

(4,938)
4,694
459
5,332
2,732
2,746
2,424
10,018
371
8,041
(1,396)
15,002
(7,280)

38,205

2,262
3,394
158
6,167
1,919
4,596
374
—
945
5,029
—
12,099
(5,331)

31,612

Number

Number

89,382,909
820,997
1,552,359
2,062,239

85,284,663
755,018
2,983,371
1,913,430

93,818,504

90,936,482

(5.5)p
(5.3)p

42.7p
40.7p

2.7p
2.5p

37.1p
34.8p

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements11 Intangible assets

Cost
At 31 January 2019
Additions
Capitalised internal development
Acquired through business combinations1
Disposals
Exchange differences

At 31 January 2020

Additions
Capitalised internal development
Acquired through business combinations1
Disposals
Exchange differences

At 31 January 2021

Amortisation and impairment
At 31 January 2019
Charge for the year2
Disposals
Exchange differences

At 31 January 2020

Charge for the year2
Disposals
Exchange differences

At 31 January 2021

Net book value at 31 January 2021

Net book value at 31 January 2020

Software
£’000

Trade name
£’000

Customer
relationships
£’000

Non-compete
£’000

Goodwill
£’000

Total
£’000

11,756
148
1,677
6
(741)
(10)

14,141
—
—
2,436
—
(12)

12,836

16,565

290
1,819
5
(397)
(25)

—
—
2,108
—
(336)

51,367
—
—
15,308
—
(65)

66,610

—
—
7,207
—
(949)

5,715
—
—
1,159
—
(3)

6,871

—
—
1,286
—
(97)

90,270
—
—
22,336
—
(130)

112,476

—
—
14,735
—
(1,757)

173,249
148
1,677
41,245
(741)
(220)

215,358

290
1,819
25,341
(397)
(3,164)

14,528

18,337

72,868

8,060

125,454

239,247

6,864
1,432
(125)
(12)

8,159

1,684
(158)
(23)

9,662

4,866

4,677

4,875
1,185
—
(18)

6,042

1,441
—
(157)

7,326

11,011

10,523

22,244
9,560
—
(123)

31,681

11,944
—
(551)

43,074

29,794

34,929

2,352
1,034
—
(10)

3,376

1,325
—
(63)

4,638

3,422

3,495

10,765
—
—
(73)

10,692

—
—
78

10,770

114,684

101,784

47,100
13,211
(125)
(236)

59,950

16,394
(158)
(716)

75,470

163,777

155,408

1  During the year, the Group acquired CRE, Marlin and Mach49 as well as other acquisitions and a number of trade and asset purchases, none of which are individually significant to the Group (note 26). 

2  Amortisation charge for the period includes acquired intangibles of £1,325,000 for non-compete agreements, £11,944,000 for customer relationships, £1,441,000 for trade names and £292,000 relating to software.

107

Financial statements11 Intangible assets continued
Impairment testing for cash-generating units containing goodwill 
Goodwill acquired through business combinations is allocated to cash-generating units (‘CGUs’) for impairment testing as follows:

Archetype1
Outcast (US)
M Booth (US)
Blueshirt (US)
Savanta2
ODD
Publitek
Twogether
Velocity
Elvis
Activate (US)
Brandwidth
Planning-inc
CRE
Mach49 (US)
Other3

2021
£’000

8,268
12,077
20,519
4,993
9,608
4,950
9,873
10,620
5,653
2,179
5,386
2,212
2,157
4,351
8,771
3,067

114,684

2020
£’000

7,104
12,580
22,025
5,201
8,881
4,950
9,879
10,620
5,653
2,179
5,610
2,212
2,157
—
—
2,733

101,784

1  The goodwill in Archetype (formerly known as Text 100) has increased due to the acquisition of Marlin £1,162,000 and the remainder of the change is due to change in foreign exchange.

2  The goodwill in Savanta has increased in the year due the trade and asset purchases of Future Thinking (£739,000).

3  Other goodwill represents goodwill on a number of CGUs, none of which is individually significant in comparison to the total carrying value of goodwill.

Goodwill is allocated on initial recognition to each of the Group’s CGUs that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination giving rise to the goodwill. 
The CGUs represent the lowest level within the entity at which the goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes. This is a lower level than the operating 
segments disclosed in note 2; the CGUs are allocated to operating segments based on their geographical location or the product or service they provide.

The Group performs an impairment testing process by considering:

Stage 1) 

 The performance of the brands during the previous financial year and the value in use of the brands at 31 January 2021. The value in use is calculated by 
taking the present value of expected future cash flows based on minimum expected standard growth rates applied to the Board-approved FY22 budget.

Stage 2) 

 The value in use of the brands, calculated by taking the present value of expected future cash flows based on management’s best estimate of brand-specific 
growth rates for the following four years applied to the Board-approved FY22 budget.

Note that the growth rates in stages 1 and 2 applied for year five are dependent on the geographical region of the respective brand. The long-term perpetuity growth 
rates applied for year five onwards for the US, UK and APAC regions are 2% (2020: 2%), 1.5% (2020: 0.5%) and 1% (2020: 1%) respectively. The growth rates applied for 
years two to five for the US, UK and APAC regions are 2% (2020: 1.5%), 2% (2020: 0.5%) and 3% (2020: 1%) respectively. 

108

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements 
11 Intangible assets continued
Cash flow projections
The recoverable amounts of all CGUs have been determined from value-in-use calculations based on the pre-tax operating profits before non-cash transactions including 
amortisation and depreciation taken from the most recent financial budgets approved by management for the next financial year. The Board-approved budgets are 
based on assumptions of client wins and losses, rate card changes and cost inflation as well as any other one-off items expected in the year for that particular CGU. 
The cash flow forecasts extrapolate the FY22 budgeted cash flows for the following four years based on the estimated regional growth rates, which is applied to revenue 
and costs. This rate does not exceed the average long-term growth rate for the relevant markets. The value in use is compared with the combined total of goodwill, 
intangible assets and tangible fixed assets. The growth rate in relation to the geographical region of the brand is then applied into perpetuity after five years.

Pre-tax discount rate
A pre-tax rate, being the Board’s estimate of the discount rate of 12.7% (2020: 11.2%), has been used in discounting all projected cash flows. The Board considers a 
pre-tax discount rate of 12.7% to be calculated using appropriate methodology. This rate is already in the higher end of the spectrum amongst its peers, and the Board 
views the rate as accurately reflecting the return expected by a market participant. The Board has considered whether to risk affect the discount rate used for the 
different brands. Given the nature of each business, that they operate in well-developed territories and are largely similar digital media communication businesses 
dependent on the mature economies in which they operate, the Board has considered no risk adjustment to the individual discount rates is required. Further, a scenario 
run using a higher discount rate reflective of US expected market returns indicated no goodwill impairment. Instead, the CGU forecast cash flows have been risk adjusted 
to reflect the economies in which they operate.

109

Financial statements12 Property, plant and equipment

Cost
At 31 January 2019
Exchange differences
Additions
Acquired through business combinations
Disposals

At 31 January 2020

Exchange differences
Additions
Acquired through business combinations
Disposals

At 31 January 2021

Accumulated depreciation
At 31 January 2019
Exchange differences
Charge for the year
Disposals

At 31 January 2020

Exchange differences
Charge for the year
Disposals

At 31 January 2021

Net book value at 31 January 2021

Net book value at 31 January 2020

110

Short leasehold
improvements
£’000

Office
equipment
£’000

Office
furniture
£’000

Motor
vehicles
£’000

17,813
(85)
1,126
243
(598)

18,499

(387)
386
74
(5,518)

13,054

6,196
(87)
2,119
(171)

8,057

(277)
1,736
(2,494)

7,022

6,032

10,442

8,735
(67)
1,564
104
(1,039)

9,297

(130)
1,231
48
(1,803)

8,643

6,216
(58)
1,578
(590)

7,146

(102)
1,493
(1,619)

6,918

1,725

2,151

3,276
(23)
770
14
(223)

3,814

(91)
381
5
(747)

3,362

1,542
(26)
808
(141)

2,183

(89)
651
(530)

2,215

1,147

1,631

2
—
—
—
—

2

—
—
—
—

2

2
—
—
—

2

—
—
—

2

—

—

Total
£’000

29,826
(175)
3,460
361
(1,860)

31,612

(608)
1,998
127
(8,068)

25,061

13,956
(171)
4,505
(902)

17,388

(468)
3,880
(4,643)

16,157

8,904

14,224

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements13 Trade and other receivables

Current
Trade receivables
Less: provision for impairment of trade receivables

Trade receivables – net

Other receivables
Prepayments
Accrued income
Finance lease receivables

Non-current
Rent deposits

2021
£’000

2020
£’000

59,825
(476)

59,349

1,405
4,146
9,389
3,241

77,530

52,915
(310)

52,605

2,875
4,004
10,293
483

70,260

860

809

Trade receivables disclosed above are measured at amortised cost. There were no significant changes in the accrued income balances during the reporting period.

As of 31 January 2021, trade receivables of £476,000 (2020: £310,000) were impaired. Movements in the provision were as follows:

At start of year
Provision for receivables impairment
Receivables written off during the year as uncollectable
Unused amounts reversed
Foreign exchange movements

At end of year

2021
£’000

310
478
(269)
(25)
(18)

476

2020
£’000

378
254
(284)
(31)
(7)

310

The provision for receivables impairment has been determined using an expected credit loss model by reference to historical default rates. Owing to the immaterial 
level of the provision for impairment of receivables, no further disclosure is made. The Group considers there to be no material difference between the fair value of 
trade and other receivables and their carrying amount in the balance sheet.

111

Financial statements 
 
 
13 Trade and other receivables continued
As at 31 January, the analysis of trade receivables that were not impaired is as follows:

Not past due
Up to 30 days
31 to 60 days
Greater than 61 days

At end of period

14 Trade and other payables

Current
Trade creditors
Other taxation and social security
Short-term compensated absences
Other creditors
Accruals
Deferred income

Non-current
Other creditors

2021
£’000

44,516
10,344
2,899
1,590

59,349

2021
£’000

13,964
5,593
1,766
5,295
14,997
35,704

77,319

1,576

1,576

2020
£’000

35,289
11,123
3,353
2,840

52,605

2020
£’000

13,940
5,378
1,582
2,832
13,362
22,526

59,620

16

16

The Group considers that the carrying amount of trade and other payables approximates to their fair value with the exception of obligations under finance leases; refer 
to note 19.

There were no significant changes in the deferred income balances during the reporting period. All the brought forward deferred income balance was recognised as 
revenue in the current reporting period. There was no revenue recognised in the current reporting period that related to performance obligations that were satisfied 
in a prior year. 

112

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements 
 
 
 
15 Provisions 

At 31 January 2019
Additions
On acquisition of subsidiary
Used during the year
Exchange differences

At 31 January 2020

Additions
On acquisition of subsidiary
Used during the year
Exchange differences

At 31 January 2021 

Current
Non-current

Onerous
lease ¹
£’000

541
—
—
(557)
16

—

—
—
—
—

—

—
—

Property ²
£’000

Acquisition

payments ³ 
£’000

462
612
55
—
(7)

1,122

36
18
(486)
5

695

130
565

784
4,563
—
(522)
(4)

4,821

8,041
—
(1,256)
(11)

11,595

5,385
6,210

Other 4
£’000

1,156
—
36
(671)
—

521

20
—
(35)
—

506

141
365

Total
£’000

2,943
5,175
91
(1,750)
5

6,464

8,097
18
(1,777)
(6)

12,796

5,656
7,140

1 

 Onerous lease provisions were calculated based on the remaining term of the lease and associated cost where the Group expected the cost to outweigh the benefit. Onerous leases were debited on transition to IFRS 
16 in the prior year.

2 

 Property provisions are primarily for dilapidations and include assumptions of a cost per square foot required to make good the property at the end of the lease.

3 

 Acquisition payments are provisions for the portion of consideration which is payable subject to continuing employment of the previous owners within the Group. The expected liability is recognised over the required 
employment term of the seller and is separately recognised as an employment-related acquisition payment provision.

4  Other includes provisions for potential tax liabilities and redundancy provisions.

113

Financial statements16 Leases
The movements in the year ended 31 January 2021 were as follows: 

Right-of-use assets:

Cost
At 1 February 2019
Exchange differences
Additions
Disposals

At 31 January 2020

Exchange differences
Additions
Acquired through business combinations
Disposals

At 31 January 2021

Accumulated depreciation
At 1 February 2019
Exchange differences
Charge for the year
Disposals

At 31 January 2020

Exchange differences
Charge for the year
Impairment
Disposals

At 31 January 2021

Net book value at 31 January 2021

Net book value at 31 January 2020

114

Land and buildings
£’000

44,371
(1,487)
7,955
(2,369)

48,471

(1,348)
1,137
3,543
(6,201)

45,602

—
(638)
8,691
(1,237)

6,816

(940)
7,729
8,503
(2,514)

19,594

26,008

41,655

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements16 Leases continued

Lease liabilities:

At 1 February 2020
Exchange differences
On acquisition of subsidiary
Additions
Interest expense related to lease liabilities
Disposals
Repayment of lease liabilities

At 31 January 2021

Land and
buildings
£’000

54,233
(952)
3,823
311
1,408
(3,407)
(12,647)

42,769

The following table shows the breakdown of the lease expense between amounts charged to operating profit and amounts recognised as finance income and finance costs:

Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Short-term lease expense
Low-value lease expense
Short-term sublease income

Charge to operating profit
Sublease finance income
Lease liability interest expense

Lease charge to profit before income tax

The maturity of the lease liabilities is as follows:

Amounts payable:
Within one year
In two to five years
After five years

Total gross future liability

Effect of discounting

Lease liability at 31 January

2021
£’000

7,729
933
78
(453)

8,287
(34)
1,408

9,661

2021
£’000

11,981
28,998
4,723

45,702

(2,933)

42,769

2020
£’000

8,691
986
194
(487)

9,384
(40)
1,596

10,940

2020
£’000

12,648
38,116
8,335

59,099

(4,866)

54,233

The Group does not face a significant liquidity risk with regard to its lease liabilities. Refer to note 19 for management of liquidity risk. 

115

Financial statements 
17 Other financial liabilities

At 31 January 2019
Arising during the year1
Changes in estimates2
Exchange differences
Utilised3
Unwinding of discount

At 31 January 2020

Arising during the year1
Changes in estimates2
Exchange differences
Utilised3
Reclassification
Unwinding of discount

At 31 January 2021

Current
Non-current

Deferred
consideration
£’000

Contingent
consideration ¹
£’000

Share purchase
obligation
£’000

4,646
350
—
—
(2,667)
386

2,715

—
—
—
(4,037)
2,405
179

1,262

1,262
—

24,712
14,445
6,167
(726)
(5,425)
3,008

42,181

12,885
5,332
(1,979)
(14,635)
(2,405)
4,515

45,894

9,700
36,194

1,736
—
1,919
7
(453)
158

3,367

—
2,732
(50)
—
—
459

6,508

1,206
5,302

Total
£’000

31,094
14,795
8,086
(719)
(8,545)
3,552

48,263

12,885
8,064
(2,029)
(18,672)
—
5,153

53,664

12,168
41,496

1 

 Contingent consideration on acquisitions – during the year, the Group acquired a controlling stake in Mach49, CRE and Marlin as well as a number of other acquisitions, none of which are material to the Group. (2020: 
M Booth Health, Nectar and Market Making). See note 26 for additional information on these acquisitions.

2  Gross movements in changes in assumptions are disclosed in notes 6 and 7.

3  The amounts utilised were settled £14.6m in cash and £4.1m in shares.

The estimates around contingent consideration and share purchase obligations are considered by management to be an area of significant judgement, with any changes 
in assumptions and forecasts creating volatility in the income statement. Management estimates the fair value of these liabilities taking into account expectations of 
future payments. The expectation of future payments is based on an analysis of the approved FY22 budget with further consideration being given to current and forecast 
wider market conditions. An assumed medium-term growth expectation is then applied which is specific to each individual entity over the course of the earn-out period 
and discounted back to present value using a pre-tax discount rate.

Sensitivity analysis
A five percentage point increase or decrease in the estimated future revenue growth rate, estimated future profit margin, and the discount rate used would increase 
or decrease the combined liabilities due to earn-out agreements by approximately £3,260,000, £8,825,000, and £4,093,000, respectively. The most sensitive earn-out 
individually would increase or decrease by £2,361,000, £4,426,000 and £1,535,000 due to a five percentage point increase or decrease in revenue growth, profit 
margin and discount rate. There is also sensitivity around the timing of certain earn-out payments; the effect of deferred timing on the earn-out agreements would have 
approximately a £3,250,000 impact on the liabilities. An increase in the liability would result in an increase in interest expense, while a decrease would result in a further gain.

116

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements18 Deferred taxation
Temporary differences between the carrying value of assets and liabilities in the balance sheet and their relevant value for tax purposes result in the following deferred 
tax assets and liabilities:

Accelerated
capital
allowances
£’000

Short-term
compensated
absences
£’000

Share-based
remuneration
£’000

Provision for
impairment
of trade
receivables
£’000

Excess book
basis over
tax basis of
intangible
assets
£’000

Other
temporary
differences
£’000

Tax losses
£’000

At 31 January 2019
(Charge)/credit to income
Exchange differences
Acquisition of subsidiaries
Taken to equity

At 31 January 2020

Reclassification
(Charge)/credit to income
Exchange differences
Acquisition of subsidiaries
Taken to equity

At 31 January 2021

(466)
(772)
24
44
—

(1,170)

377
508
12
(7)
—

(280)

318
(63)
(3)
—
—

252

—
(38)
(7)
—
—

207

2,876
(1,275)
—
—
(55)

1,546

(780)
133
—
—
589

1,488

53
33
(1)
—
—

85

—
43
(5)
—
—

123

(1,549)
4,117
(99)
(2,225)
—

244

780
4,136
(250)
(1,028)
—

3,882

3,841
1,125
26
472
400

5,864

(377)
1,108
(223)
74
—

6,446

After netting off balances, the following are the deferred tax assets and liabilities recognised in the Consolidated Balance Sheet:

Net deferred tax balance
Deferred tax assets
Deferred tax liabilities

Net deferred tax asset

945
(330)
(7)
—
—

608

—
(395)
6
—
—

219

2021
£’000

15,314
(3,229)

12,085

Total
£’000

6,018
2,835
(60)
(1,709)
345

7,429

—
5,495
(467)
(961)
589

12,085

2020
£’000

10,967
(3,538)

7,429

Deferred tax has been calculated using the anticipated rates that will apply when the assets and liabilities are expected to reverse based on tax rates enacted or 
substantively enacted by the balance sheet date. Notwithstanding the current year statutory loss at a Group level, the recoverability of deferred tax assets is supported 
by the expected level of future profits in the countries concerned.

The estimated value of the deferred tax asset not recognised in respect of tax losses available to carry forward is £0.2m (2020: £0.2m).

At the balance sheet date, the aggregate amount of the temporary differences in relation to the investment in subsidiaries for which deferred tax liabilities have not 
been recognised was £7.9m (2020: £7.4m). No liability has been recognised in respect of these differences as the Group is in a position to control the timing of the 
reversal of the temporary differences and the Group considers that it is probable that such differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

117

Financial statements19 Financial instruments
Financial risk management, policies and strategies
The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise bank loans, finance leases, cash and short-term deposits. The main purpose of these financial instruments is to 
provide finance for the Group’s operations. The Group has various other financial assets and liabilities such as trade receivables and payables, which arise directly 
from operations.

The main risks arising from the Group’s financial instruments are interest rate risk, liquidity risk, foreign exchange risk and credit risk. The Board reviews and agrees 
policies for managing each of these risks and they are summarised below. 

Interest rate risk
The Group’s exposure to the risk of changes in market interest rates relates primarily to the Group’s long-term debt obligations.

The following table demonstrates the sensitivity to a reasonably possible change in interest rates, with all other variables held constant, on the Group’s profit before 
tax at 31 January 2021, based on period-end balances and rates.

The sensitivity analyses provided are hypothetical only and should be used with caution as the impacts provided are not necessarily indicative of the actual impacts 
that would be experienced because the Group’s actual exposure to market rates changes as the Group’s portfolio of debt and cash changes. In addition, the effect of 
a change in a particular market variable on fair values or cash flows is calculated without considering interrelationships between the various market rates or mitigating 
actions that would be taken by the Group. The changes in valuations are estimates of the impact of changes in market variables and are not a prediction of future 
events or anticipated gains or losses.

Group

Liquidity risk
The Group manages its risk to a shortage of funds with a mixture of long and short-term committed facilities. 

Movement
in basis points

+200

2021
£’000

(260)

2020
£’000

(769)

On 5 February 2018 the Group extended its facilities agreement with HSBC to include a loan of £20m in addition to the revolving loan credit facility (‘RCF’) of £40m 
(available in multiple currencies) which is available until 5 July 2022. The £20m loan was drawn down on 9 February 2018 and has £5m left to be repaid in December 2021 
and the loan bears interest at the same margin plus LIBOR as the RCF. The interest rate is variable dependent on the net debt: EBITDA ratio. The Group also has a $7m 
facility available in the US.

At 31 January 2021 the Group had an undrawn amount of £31,848,833 (2020: £11,277,521) on the RCF in the UK and $3,220,637 (2020: $4,012,637) available on the $7m 
US facility (this allows for the letters of credit in place).

118

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements19 Financial instruments continued
Liquidity risk continued
The following table summarises the maturity profile based on the remaining period between the balance sheet date and the contractual maturity date of the Group’s 
financial liabilities at 31 January 2021 and 31 January 2020, based on contractual undiscounted payments:

At 31 January 2021
Financial liabilities 

At 31 January 2020
Financial liabilities 

Within
one year
£’000

Between two
and five years
£’000

More than
five years
£’000

Total
£’000

70,581

101,177

4,723

176,481

70,248

123,839

10,977

205,064

Currency risk
As a result of significant global operations, the Group’s balance sheet can be affected significantly by movements in the foreign exchange rates against sterling. This is 
largely through the translation of balances denominated in a currency other than the functional currency of an entity. The Group has transactional currency exposures 
in the US, Europe and the Asia Pacific region, including foreign currency bank accounts and intercompany recharges. The Group considers the use of currency derivatives 
to protect significant US dollar and euro currency exposures against changes in exchange rates; however, the Group has not held derivative financial instruments at 
the end of either period.

The following table demonstrates the sensitivity to reasonably possible changes in exchange rates, with all other variables held constant, of the Group’s profit before 
tax based on period-end balances, year average and period-end rates:

US dollar
Euro
Australian dollar
Indian rupee

Weakening
against sterling

20%
20%
20%
20%

2021
£’000

(4,647)
(512)
(228)
(17)

2020
£’000

(5,060)
(358)
(262)
115

The following table demonstrates the sensitivity to reasonable possible changes in exchange rates, with all other variables held constant, of the Group’s net assets on 
period-end balances and rates:

US dollar
Euro
Australian dollar
Indian rupee

Weakening
against sterling

20%
20%
20%
20%

2021
£’000

(13)
(509)
(349)
(110)

2020
£’000

(5,197)
(561)
(412)
(63)

119

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
19 Financial instruments continued
Credit risk
The Group’s principal financial assets are bank balances, cash and trade and other receivables which represent the Group’s maximum exposure to credit risk in relation 
to financial assets. The Group trades only with recognised, creditworthy third parties. It is the Group’s policy that customers who wish to trade on credit terms be subject 
to credit verification procedures. In addition, receivable balances are monitored on an ongoing basis with the result that the Group’s exposure to bad debts has not 
been significant. The amounts presented in the balance sheet are net of provisions for impairment of trade receivables, estimated by the Group’s management based 
on an expected credit loss model driven by historical experience and factors specific to certain debtors. 

The credit risk on liquid funds is limited because the counterparties are reputable banks with high credit ratings assigned by international credit rating agencies, although 
the Board recognises that in the current economic climate these indicators cannot be relied upon exclusively.

Maximum exposure to credit risk

Total trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents

2021
£’000

77,530
26,831

2020
£’000

70,260
28,661

Capital risk management
The Group manages its capital to ensure that entities in the Group will be able to continue as a going concern while maximising the return to stakeholders through the 
optimisation of the debt and equity balance. Total capital of the Group is calculated as total equity as shown in the Consolidated Balance Sheet, plus net debt. Net debt 
is calculated as total borrowings, less cash and cash equivalents. This measure of net debt excludes any acquisition-related contingent liabilities or share purchase 
obligations. The quantum of these obligations is dependent on estimations of forecast profitability. Settlement dates are variable and range from 2021 to 2025.

Total loans and borrowings1
Less: cash and cash equivalents
Net (cash)/debt
Total equity 

Total capital

1  Total loans and borrowings is made up of current obligations (£5,000,000) and non-current obligations (£7,810,000).

2021
£’000

12,810
(26,831)
(14,021)
116,881

102,860

2020
£’000

38,007
(28,661)
9,346
112,711

122,057

120

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements19 Financial instruments continued
Capital risk management continued

Net (cash)/debt
Share purchase obligation
Contingent consideration 
Deferred consideration

Net debt plus earn-out liabilities 

The movement in net debt is as follows: 

Total loans and borrowings
Less: cash and cash equivalents

At
1 February
2019
£’000

25,678
(20,501)

Cash 
(inflows)/
outflows
from
operations
£’000

(4,006)
(15,470)

Net debt

5,177

(19,476)

2021
£’000

(14,021)
6,508
45,894
1,262

39,643

Foreign
exchange,
fair value
and
non-cash
movements
£’000

(285)
220

(65)

2020
£’000

9,346
3,367
42,181
2,715

57,609

At
1 February
2021
£’000

12,810
(26,831)

(14,021)

Acquisitions
and
contingent
consideration
£’000

17,045
7,128

24,173

Foreign
exchange,
fair value
and
non-cash
movements
£’000

(710)
182

(528)

At
1 February
2020
£’000

38,007
(28,661)

Cash 
(inflows)/
outflows
from
operations
£’000

(24,912)
(22,026)

9,346

(46,938)

Acquisitions
and
contingent
consideration
£’000

—
23,636

23,636

Externally imposed capital requirement
Under the terms of the Group’s banking covenants the Group must meet certain criteria based on the ratio of net debt to adjusted EBITDA; net debt plus earn-out 
liabilities (note 17) to adjusted EBITDA; and adjusted net finance charges to adjusted EBITDA. 

The Group maintains long-term cash forecasts which incorporate forecast covenant positions as part of the Group’s capital and cash management. There have been 
no breaches of the banking covenants in the current or prior period.

Fair values of financial assets and liabilities
Fair value is the amount at which a financial instrument can be exchanged in an arm’s-length transaction between informed and willing parties, other than a forced or 
liquidation sale.

The book value of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities equals the fair value of such items as at 31 January 2021, with the exception of obligations under finance 
leases. The book value of obligations under finance leases is £42,769,000 (2020: £54,233,000) and the fair value is £45,702,000 (2020: £59,099,000). The fair value 
of obligations under finance leases is estimated by discounting future cash flows to net present value and is Level 3 within the fair value hierarchy.

121

Financial statements19 Financial instruments continued
Financial instruments – detailed disclosures
Financial instruments recognised in the balance sheet
The IFRS 9 categories of financial assets and liabilities included in the balance sheet and the line in which they are included are as follows:

At 31 January 2021

Non-current financial assets
Investment in equity instruments
Other receivables

Current financial assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Trade and other receivables

Current financial liabilities
Loans and borrowings
Trade and other payables
Lease liabilities
Provisions
Contingent consideration¹
Share purchase obligation¹
Deferred consideration¹

Non-current financial liabilities
Loans and borrowings
Lease liabilities
Provisions
Other payables
Contingent consideration¹
Share purchase obligation¹

1  See note 17.

122

At fair value
through profit
or loss –
mandatorily
measured
£’000

—
—

—

—
—

—

—
—
—
—
1,206
9,700
—

10,906

—
—
—
—
36,194
5,302

41,496

Financial
liabilities at
amortised
cost
£’000

—
—

—

—
—

—

5,000
36,022
10,957
5,656
—
—
1,262

58,897

7,810
31,812
7,140
1,576
—
—

48,338

FVTOCI
£’000

955
—

955

—
—

—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—

—
—
—
—
—
—

—

Financial
assets at
amortised
cost
£’000

—
860

860

Total
£’000

955
860

1,815

26,831
73,384

26,831
73,384

100,215

100,215

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—

—
—
—
—
—
—

—

5,000
36,022
10,957
5,656
1,206
97,00
1,262

69,803

7,810
31,812
7,140
1,576
36,194
5,302

89,834

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements19 Financial instruments continued
Financial instruments – detailed disclosures continued
Financial instruments recognised in the balance sheet continued
The Group has no fair value Level 1 instruments (2020: none). The investments in equity instruments are Level 2 instruments. Level 2 fair value measurements are those 
derived from inputs other than quoted prices, such as historical quoted prices. 

All other instruments at fair value through profit or loss were Level 3 instruments as per the table above in the current year and were as per the table below in the prior 
year. Level 3 financial instruments are valued using the discounted cash flow method to capture the present value of the expected future economic benefits that will 
flow out of the Group arising from the contingent consideration or share purchase obligation. Unrealised gains or losses are recognised within finance income/expense; 
see notes 6 and 7. They are not based on observable market data.

At 31 January 2020

Non-current financial assets
Investment in equity instruments
Other receivables

Current financial assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Trade and other receivables

Current financial liabilities
Loans and borrowings
Trade and other payables
Lease liabilities
Provisions
Contingent consideration1
Share purchase obligation1
Deferred consideration1

At fair value
through profit
or loss –
mandatorily
measured
£’000

—
—

—

—
—

—

—
—
—
—
1,269
15,366
—

16,635

Financial
liabilities at
amortised
cost
£’000

—
—

—

—
—

—

5,000
31,716
11,210
1,522
—
—
2,715

52,163

FVTOCI
£’000

1,075
—

1,075

—
—

—

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—

Financial
assets at
amortised
cost
£’000

—
809

809

28,661
66,256

94,917

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—

Total
£’000

1,075
809

1,884

28,661
66,256

94,917

5,000
31,716
11,210
1,522
1,269
15,366
2,715

68,798

123

Financial statements 
19 Financial instruments continued
Financial instruments – detailed disclosures continued
Financial instruments recognised in the balance sheet continued

At 31 January 2020

Non-current financial liabilities
Loans and borrowings
Lease liabilities
Provisions
Other payables
Contingent consideration1
Share purchase obligation1

1  See note 17.

At fair value
through profit
or loss –
mandatorily
measured
£’000

—
—
—
—
26,815
2,098

28,913

Financial
liabilities at
amortised
cost
£’000

33,007
43,023
4,942
16
—
—

80,988

Financial
assets at
amortised
cost
£’000

—
—
—
—
—
—

—

FVTOCI
£’000

—
—
—
—
—
—

—

Total
£’000

33,007
43,023
4,942
16
26,815
2,098

109,901

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings
The table below provides a summary of the Group’s loans and borrowing as at 31 January 2021:

Current
Variable rate bank loan

Non-current
Variable rate bank loan

Effective interest rate

2021
£’000

2020
£’000

HSBC Bank base rate + 1.50% 

5,000

5,000

HSBC Bank base rate + 1.50%

7,810

33,007

The fair value of the borrowings at 31 January 2021 is US$11,000,000 (£8,013,000) (2020: US$21,000,000 (£15,934,000)). In the prior year, The foreign exchange loss 
of £411,000 on translation of the borrowing to functional currency at the end of the reporting period was recognised in a hedging reserve in shareholders’ equity. As a 
result of ineffectiveness, £Nil was transferred during the period from the hedging reserve to the income statement (2020: £Nil).

124

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements 
20 Share capital
Called up share capital
Ordinary Shares of 2.5p each:

Authorised, allotted, called up and fully paid
At start of year
Issued in the year in respect of contingent and deferred consideration and share purchase obligations 
Issued in the year in satisfaction of vested LTIPs (note 21)
Issued in the year in respect of growth share sales

At end of year

Fully paid Ordinary Shares carry one vote per share and the right to dividends.

2021
Number

2020
Number

86,552,648
1,661,610
187,001
2,581,715

83,563,988
1,456,041
583,176
949,443

90,982,974

86,552,648

21 Share-based payments
The Group uses a Black-Scholes model to calculate the fair value of options on grant date for new issues and modifications for LTIPs. At each period end the cumulative 
expense is adjusted to take into account any changes in the estimate of the likely number of shares expected to vest. Details of the relevant LTIP schemes are given 
in the following note. All the share-based payment plans are subject to non-market performance conditions such as adjusted earnings per share targets and continued 
employment. All schemes are equity-settled. The Group uses a weighted average probability model to value the brand appreciation rights as permitted under IFRS 2.

In the period ended 31 January 2021 the Group recognised a charge of £11,628,000 (2020: £5,629,000) made up of £1,402,000 (2020: £226,000) in respect of 
employment-related LTIP shares and restricted stock units; £2,185,000 (2020: £374,000) given in respect of the grant of brand equity interests of 8.5% in M Booth & 
Associates LLC, 9.5% in ODD London Limited, 15% in Savanta Group Limited and 20% in Twogether Creative Limited (2020: 4.5% in M Booth & Associates LLC), as well 
as £8,041,000 (2020: £5,029,000) for employment-linked acquisition-related payments. 

Movement on options and performance shares granted (represented in Ordinary Shares):

Long-Term Incentive Plan — performance shares

Outstanding
31 January
2020
Number
(’000)

925

Granted
Number
(’000)

559

Lapsed
Number
(’000)

(219)

Exercised
Number
(’000)

(187)

Outstanding
31 January
2021
Number
(’000)

Exercisable
31 January
2021
Number
(’000)

1,078

159

125

Financial statements 
 
21 Share-based payments continued
The fair value of performance shares granted in the period calculated using a Black-Scholes model was as follows:

Fair value of performance shares granted under the LTIP (p)
Share price at date of grant (p)
Risk-free rate (%)
Expected life (years)
Expected volatility (%)
Dividend yield (%)

July 2020

338
377
1.94
3
41.0
0.66

Expected volatility was determined by calculating the historical volatility of the Company’s share price, over a period equal to the expected life of the options. 

Performance shares issued by the Company under the Next Fifteen Communications Group plc Long-Term Incentive Plan are granted at a nil exercise price. The weighted 
average share price at the date of exercise for share options exercised in the year was 365p (2020: 520p). For share options outstanding at the end of the year the 
weighted average remaining contractual life is one year (2020: one year). 

22 Performance shares
The Company has issued options over its shares to employees that remain outstanding as follows:

Performance shares

Next Fifteen Communications Group plc 
Long-Term Incentive Plan

Number
of shares

Performance
period start date

Performance
period end date

Performance
share grant date

47,593
158,638
80,798
194,762
74,564
522,132

1,078,487

1 February 2017
1 February 2018
1 February 2018
1 February 2019
1 February 2019
1 February 2020

31 January 2022
31 January 2021
31 January 2023
31 January 2022
31 January 2024
31 January 2023

2 May 2017
10 April 2018
10 April 2018
25 April 2019
25 April 2019
30 July 2020

During the period the Company issued 187,001 shares to satisfy the vesting under the Next 15 LTIPs. These were initially subscribed for by the ESOP. No shares are 
now held in treasury (see note 23).

126

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements 
 
 
22 Performance shares continued
The Company’s current Long-Term Incentive Plan is the 2015 LTIP, which was approved by shareholders at the Company’s 2015 AGM. Under the 2015 LTIP performance 
shares or share options may be awarded. The performance is measured over a period of either three or five consecutive financial years of the Group, commencing 
with the financial year in which the award was granted. The Committee has decided that, initially, there will be two performance conditions: 

(a) 

 an earnings per share (‘EPS’) target, which will determine 70% of the total vesting. Diluted adjusted EPS growth is calculated from the information published in the 
Group’s accounts and is based on the adjusted EPS measure. If the growth in the Company’s earnings per share in the relevant year is at least 15%, 100% of 70% 
of the total award will vest. If the compound growth in EPS in the relevant year is between 5% and 15% then between 25% and 100% of 70% of the total award will 
vest on a straight-line basis. If EPS does not grow at an average of 5% or more, the full award will lapse; and 

(b)   a key performance indicator (‘KPI’) target, which will determine 30% of the total vesting. Each participant will have a number of KPIs relating to his or her role. The 
Remuneration Committee will determine the extent to which the KPIs have been met in each relevant year. 100% of 30% of the total award will vest if the KPIs have 
been met in full. A smaller percentage of 30% of the total award will vest if the Committee determines that the KPIs have been substantially met. 

23 Investment in own shares
Employee share ownership plan (‘ESOP’)
The purpose of the ESOP is to enable the Company to offer participation in the ownership of its shares to Group employees, principally as a reward and incentive 
scheme. Arrangements for the distribution of benefits to employees, which may be the ownership of shares in the Company or the granting of options over shares in 
the Company held by the ESOP, are made at the ESOP’s discretion in such manner as the ESOP considers appropriate. Administration costs of the ESOP are accounted 
for in the profit and loss account of the Company as they are incurred.

At 31 January 2021 the ESOP held Nil (2020: Nil) Ordinary Shares in the Company.

The ESOP subscribed for 187,001 newly issued shares which were allotted and immediately disposed of in order to satisfy LTIP vesting of 187,001 shares for £Nil 
consideration (2020: 583,176 shares for £Nil consideration). Nil shares were subscribed for, allotted and immediately disposed of in respect of satisfaction of a restricted 
stock arrangement for £Nil proceeds (2020: Nil shares for £Nil proceeds).

127

Financial statements24 Other reserves

At 31 January 2019
Total comprehensive expense for the year
Purchase and take on of shares
Movement due to ESOP LTIP and growth shares exercises

At 31 January 2020

Purchase and take on of shares
Movement due to ESOP LTIP and growth shares exercises

At 31 January 2021

Merger
reserve
£’000

3,075
—
—
—

3,075

—
—

3,075

ESOP
reserve ¹
£’000

—
—
(15)
15

—

(5)
5

—

Hedging
reserve
£’000

(2,056)
(411)
—
—

(2,467)

—
—

(2,467)

Total
other reserves
£’000

1,019
(411)
(15)
15

608

(5)
5

608

1 

 The ESOP Trust’s investment in the Group’s shares is deducted from equity in the Consolidated Balance Sheet as if they were treasury shares and presented in the ESOP reserve.

25 Commitments and contingent liabilities
Operating leases – Group as lessee
As a result of the transition to IFRS 16, leases previously classified as operating leases have now been recognised on balance sheet, except for the short-term leases 
and leases of low-value assets which are included below. 

As at 31 January 2021, the Group’s total future minimum lease rentals are as follows:

In respect of operating leases which will be paid in the following periods:
Within one year
In two to five years
After five years

2021

Land and
buildings
£’000

10
—
—

10

Other
£’000

69
56
—

125

2020

Land and
buildings
£’000

793
—
—

793

Other
£’000

148
121
—

269

128

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements26 Acquisitions and equity transactions
During the year the following material transactions took place:

1. 

the acquisition of UK-based Conversion Rates Experts Limited;

3. 

the acquisition of US-based Mach49 LLC.

2. 

the acquisition of UK-based Marlin PR Limited; and

More details on each transaction are provided below.

1. Conversion Rates Experts Limited
On 15 July 2020, Next 15 purchased the entire share capital of Conversion Rates Experts Limited (“CRE”) (previously known as Implementra Limited), a UK-based web 
optimisation agency. 

Goodwill of £4,351,000 arises from anticipated profitability and future operating synergies from the acquisition. 

In the post-acquisition period CRE has contributed £2,061,000 to net revenue and £839,000 to profit before tax. If acquired on 1 February 2020 CRE would have 
contributed net revenue of £3,533,000 and profit before tax of £1,438,000 to the Group results. The following table sets out the estimated book values of the identifiable 
assets acquired and their fair value to the Group. 

Book value
at acquisition
£’000

Fair value
adjustments
£’000

Fair value
to the Group
£’000

Non-current assets
Acquired intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Current assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Other current assets1
Current liabilities
Deferred tax liability

Net assets acquired

Goodwill

Consideration
Initial consideration settled in cash2
Initial consideration settled in Ordinary Shares of the Parent
Total discounted contingent consideration

—
13

6,408
164
(1,314)
—

5,271

2,717
—

—
—
—
(516)

2,201

2,717
13

6,408
164
(1,314
(516)

7,472

4,351

11,823

10,230
1,328
265

11,823

1  The fair value of receivables acquired is £145,000.

2   This includes initial consideration paid for the business and cash paid for working capital.

None of the goodwill is expected to be deductible for tax purposes. Deal costs (included in other operating costs) amount to £73,000. Further consideration is payable 
based on the profit before interest and tax of CRE over the next four years. 

129

Financial statements 
 
26 Acquisitions and equity transactions continued
2. Marlin PR Limited
On 31 October 2020, Archetype Agency Limited purchased the entire share capital of To This Day Limited and its trading subsidiary Marlin PR Limited (“Marlin”). 

Goodwill of £1,162,000 arises from anticipated profitability and future operating synergies from the acquisition.

In the post-acquisition period Marlin has contributed £658,000 to net revenue and £63,000 to profit before tax. If acquired on 1 February 2020 Marlin would have 
contributed net revenue of £2,630,000 and profit before tax of £253,000 to the Group results. The following table sets out the estimated book values of the identifiable 
assets acquired and their fair value to the Group. The due diligence over the identifiable assets acquired is still in progress; therefore, the fair value of the assets used 
below are provisional.

Book value
at acquisition
£’000

Fair value
adjustments
£’000

Fair value
to the Group
£’000

Non-current assets
Acquired intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment

Current assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Other current assets1
Current liabilities
Provisions
Deferred tax liability

Net assets acquired

Goodwill

Consideration
Initial consideration settled in cash2
Initial consideration settled in Ordinary Shares of the Parent
Total discounted contingent consideration

5
63

592
563
(884)
(18)
(8)

313

1,291
—

—
—
—
—
(245)

1,046

1,296
63

592
563
(884)
(18)
(253)

1,359

1,162

2,521

1,758
484
279

2,521

1  The fair value of receivables acquired is £495,000.

2   This includes initial consideration paid for the business and cash paid for working capital.

None of the goodwill is expected to be deductible for tax purposes. Deal costs (included in operating costs) amount to £95,000. 

130

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
26 Acquisitions and equity transactions continued
3. Mach49 LLC
On 25 August 2020, Next 15 purchased the entire share capital of Mach49 LLC (“Mach49”) and its subsidiaries, the Silicon Valley-based growth incubator for global 
businesses. Goodwill of £9,033,000 ($12,040,000) arises from anticipated profitability and future operating synergies from the acquisition. 

In the post-acquisition period Mach49 has contributed £5,739,000 to net revenue and £396,000 to profit before tax. If acquired on 1 February 2020 Mach49 would 
have contributed net revenue of £13,774,000 and profit before tax of £950,000 to the Group results. The due diligence over the identifiable assets acquired is still in 
progress; therefore, the fair value of the assets used below are provisional.

The following table sets out the estimated book values of the identifiable assets acquired and their fair value to the Group.

Non-current assets
Acquired intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment

Current assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Other current assets1
Current liabilities

Net assets acquired

Goodwill3

Consideration
Initial consideration settled in cash2
Total discounted contingent consideration

Book value
at acquisition
£’000

Fair value
adjustments
£’000

Fair value
to the Group
£’000

—
3,477

248
735
(5,219)

(759)

5,416
—

—
—
—

5,416

5,416
3,477

248
735
(5,219)

4,657

9,033

13,690

1,500
12,190

13,690

1  The fair value of receivables acquired is £418,000.

2  This includes initial consideration paid for the business and cash paid for working capital.

3   Goodwill is denominated in USD and therefore the exchange rate at the point of acquisition has been used.

None of the goodwill is expected to be deductible for tax purposes. Deal costs (included in operating costs) amount to £56,000.

Further consideration is payable based on the profit before interest and tax of Mach49 over the next four years.

131

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
26 Acquisitions and equity transactions continued
The following table summarises the net cash outflow and value of shares issued on acquisition of subsidiaries during the year ending 31 January 2021:

CRE
Marlin
Mach49
Other1

Consideration
settled in cash
£’000

Cash and cash
equivalent
balances
acquired
£’000

10,230
1,758
1,500
2,262

15,750

(6,408)
(592)
(248)
(405)

(7,653)

Total
net cash
outflow
£’000

3,822
1,166
1,252
1,857

8,097

Value of
shares issued
£’000

1,328
484
—
—

1,812

1  Other represents amounts in relation to a number of acquisitions, none of which is individually significant to the Group.

27 Subsidiaries
The Group’s subsidiaries at 31 January 2021 are listed below.

Legal Entity

Activate Marketing Services LLC
Agent3 Limited
Agent3 LLC
Archetype Agency AB
Archetype Agency Beijing Limited

Archetype Agency BV
Archetype Agency GmbH
Archetype Agency Limited

Archetype Agency Limited
Archetype Agency LLC

Archetype Agency Private Limited
Archetype Agency Pte Limited
Archetype Agency Pty Limited
Archetype Agency SARL
Archetype Agency Sdn. Bhd.
Archetype Agency SL

Country of 
Incorporation

USA
United Kingdom
USA
Sweden
China

Netherlands
Germany
Hong Kong

United Kingdom
USA

India
Singapore
Australia
France
Malaysia
Spain

Directly 
owned
by the 
Company

Percentage 
voting rights 
held by 
Group

Address





CT Corp System, 818 West Seventh Street, Suite 930, Los Angeles, CA 90017
100
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
56.9
CT Corp System, 818 West Seventh Street, Suite 930, Los Angeles, CA 90017
56.9
100
1, Ferkens gränd, 111 30 Stockholm, Sweden
100 14F, Room 1703,1705, Tower 2, No. 22 Guanghua Road, Chaoyang District, Beijing, 100020 China

100
100
100

100
100

100
100
100
100
100
100

Silodam 1D, 1013 AL Amsterdam, Netherlands
Nymphenburger Straße 168, 80634 München

Rooms 1102 &1103 11th Floor, 299QRC, Nos. 287-299 Queens Road Central,  

Sheung Wan, Hong Kong
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
The Corporation Trust Company, 1209 Orange Street – Corporation Trust Center, 
New Castle County, Wilmington, DE 19801
2nd Floor, TDI Centre, Plot No.7, Jasola, New Delhi – 110025
36 Prinsep Street #05-01/02, Singapore 188 648
GRANT THORNTON AUSTRALIA, Level 17, 383 Kent Street Sydney, Australia
17 rue de la Banque, 75002 Paris
BO3-B-12-1, Level 12, Menara 3A, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
c/ Prim, 19 5ª Planta, Madrid 28004

132

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements 
27 Subsidiaries continued

Legal Entity

Archetype Agency SRL
August.One Communications 
International Limited
Bite Communications Group Limited
Bite Communications Limited
Brandwidth Group Limited
Brandwidth LLC

Brandwidth Marketing Limited
BYND Limited
BYND LLC
Communicate Research Limited
Conversion Rate Experts Limited
Elvis Communications Limited
Encore Digital Media Limited
Fearless Labs Limited
HPI Research Limited
Hypertext Communications Private Limited
Hypertext Pte Limited
IF.Agency, LLC

Mach49 LLC
Mach49 Limited
Mach49 Singapore Pte Ltd
M Booth & Associates LLC

Country of 
Incorporation

Italy
United Kingdom

United Kingdom
United Kingdom
United Kingdom
USA

United Kingdom
United Kingdom
USA
United Kingdom
United Kingdom
United Kingdom
United Kingdom
United Kingdom
United Kingdom
India
Singapore
USA

USA
United Kingdom
Singapore
USA

M Booth Health LLC

USA

Market Making Limited
Marlin PR Limited
Narration LLC

United Kingdom
United Kingdom
USA

Nectar Communications LLC
Next Fifteen Communications Corporation

USA
USA

Directly 
owned
by the 
Company

Percentage 
voting rights 
held by 
Group




















100
100

100
100
100
100

100
100
100
100
100
100
100
51
100
100
100
100

100
100
100
100

100

100
100
100

100
100

Piazzale Principessa Clotilde, 8 20121 Milano
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF

Address

75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
The Corporation Trust Company, 1209 Orange Street – Corporation Trust Center, 
New Castle County, Wilmington, DE 19801
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
CT Corp System, 818 West Seventh Street, Suite 930, Los Angeles, CA 90017
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
3 Melville Street, Edinburgh, Scotland EH3 7PE
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
Unit 503, Fifth Floor, Millennium Plaza, M.G. Road, Gurgaon, Haryana, 122002, India 
600 North Bridge Road, #23-01, Parkview Square, Singapore 188 778
The Corporation Trust Company, 1209 Orange Street – Corporation Trust Center, 
New Castle County, Wilmington, DE 19801
CT Corp System, 818 West Seventh Street, Suite 930, Los Angeles, CA 90017
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
22 Malacca Street #04-03 RB Capital Building Singapore 048980
The Corporation Trust Company, 1209 Orange Street – Corporation Trust Center, 
New Castle County, Wilmington, DE 19801
The Corporation Trust Company, 1209 Orange Street – Corporation Trust Center, 
New Castle County, Wilmington, DE 19801
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
The Corporation Trust Company, 1209 Orange Street – Corporation Trust Center, 
New Castle County, Wilmington, DE 19801
CT Corp System, 818 West Seventh Street, Suite 930, Los Angeles, CA 90017
The Corporation Trust Company, 1209 Orange Street – Corporation Trust Center, 
New Castle County, Wilmington, DE 19801

133

Financial statementsCountry of 
Incorporation

Directly 
owned
by the 
Company

Percentage 
voting rights 
held by 
Group

27 Subsidiaries continued

Legal Entity

Next Fifteen Holdco1 Limited
ODD Communications Limited
ODD London Limited
Outcast London Limited
Palladium Group Limited
Planning-inc Limited
Publitek GmbH
Publitek Limited
Publitek LLC
Savanta Analytics Limited
Savanta Group Limited
Savanta Group LLC
Technical Publicity Limited
Text 100 Pty Limited
Text 100 International Limited
Text 100 Proprietary Limited

United Kingdom
United Kingdom
United Kingdom
United Kingdom
United Kingdom
United Kingdom
Germany
United Kingdom
USA
Canada
United Kingdom
USA
United Kingdom
Australia
United Kingdom
South Africa

The Blueshirt Group LLC
The Craft Consulting Limited
The Lexis Agency Limited
The Outcast Agency LLC
To This Day Limited
Twogether Creative Limited
Twogether Creative LLC
Velocity Partners Limited
Velocity Partners US Inc.
Vox Public Relations India Private Limited

USA
United Kingdom
United Kingdom
USA
United Kingdom
United Kingdom
USA
United Kingdom
USA
India




















100
100
90
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100

89.3
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100

Address

3 Melville Street, Edinburgh, Scotland EH3 7PE
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
Nymphenburger Straße 168, 80634 München
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
CT Corporation System, 780 Commercial Street SE, Suite 100, Salem OR 97301
700 West Georgia Street, Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada, V7Y 1B8
3 Melville Street, Edinburgh, Scotland EH3 7PE
CT Corp System, 818 West Seventh Street, Suite 930, Los Angeles, CA 90017
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
Level 17, 383 Kent Street, Sydney NSW 2000, Australia
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF

13 Wellington Road, Parktown, 2193, Private Bag X60500, Houghton,  

Johannesburg, 2041, South Africa
CT Corp System, 818 West Seventh Street, Suite 930, Los Angeles, CA 90017
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
CT Corp System, 818 West Seventh Street, Suite 930, Los Angeles, CA 90017
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
CT Corp System, 818 West Seventh Street, Suite 930, Los Angeles, CA 90017
75 Bermondsey Street, London SE1 3XF
CT Corporation System, 28 Liberty Street, New York, NY 10005
2nd Floor, TDI Centre, Plot No.7, Jasola, New Delhi – 110025

All shares held are a class of Ordinary Shares with the exception of the US LLCs where LLC units are held.

The principal activity of the subsidiary undertakings is digital communications consultancy specialising predominantly in the technology and consumer sectors.

All subsidiary undertakings operate in the country in which they have been incorporated. All subsidiary undertakings listed are included in the consolidated results. 
None of the Group’s subsidiaries have a non-controlling interest that is individually material to the Group. As a result the disclosure requirements for subsidiaries with 
a material non-controlling interest under IFRS 12 are not considered necessary.

134

Notes to the accounts continuedfor the year ended 31 January 2021Financial statements27 Subsidiaries continued
The following companies are exempt from the requirements relating to the audit of individual accounts for the year/period ended 31 January 2021 by virtue of section 
479A of the Companies Act 2006: Agent3 Limited (08331678), Archetype Agency Limited (03329933), August.One Communications International Limited (03224261), 
Bite Communications Group Limited (04131879), Bite Communications Limited (03023521), Brandwidth Group Limited (09599858), Brandwidth Marketing Limited 
(03860505), BYND Limited (07123452), Communicate Research Limited (04810991), Conversion Rate Experts Limited (05895439), Elvis Communications Limited 
(04768344), Encore Digital Media Limited (SC449653), Fearless Labs Limited (13073454), HPI Research Limited (05816194), Mach49 Limited (12281031), Market Making 
Limited (07913465), Marlin PR Limited (06480768), Next Fifteen Holdco1 Limited (SC364548), The Lexis Agency Limited (04404752), ODD Communications Limited 
(07861569), Outcast London Limited (07831770), Palladium Group Limited (09460746), Technical Publicity Limited (02384040), Text 100 International Limited (02433862), 
The Craft Consulting Limited (09439145), To This Day Limited (10479051) and Velocity Partners Limited (04128107).

28 Related-party transactions
The ultimate controlling party of the Group is Next Fifteen Communications Group plc (incorporated and registered in England and Wales). The Company has a related-
party relationship with its subsidiaries (note 27) and with its Directors. Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries have been eliminated on consolidation 
and are not disclosed in this note. During the period to 31 January 2021 there were the following related-party transactions:

Brand

Services

Blueshirt

Consultancy

Related party

Blueshirt Capital Advisors  
is an associate of Next 15

Income
impact
2021
£’000

Asset
at year end
2021
£’000

Income
impact
2020
£’000

Asset
at year end
2020
£’000

823

771

35

34

Dividends were paid to Directors of the Company during the year in proportion to their shareholdings in the Company. Tim Dyson, Peter Harris, Penny Ladkin-Brand 
and Richard Eyre received dividends of £Nil, £Nil, £Nil and £Nil respectively (2020: £383,897, £26,787, £Nil and £7,884). Key management personnel compensation is 
disclosed in note 3.

29 Operating lease rental receivables
As at 31 January, the Group’s total future minimum lease payments receivable under non-cancellable leases are as follows:

In respect of operating leases which will be receivable in the period:
Within one year
In two to five years

2021
£’000

251
—

251

2020
£’000

231
—

231

30 Events after the balance sheet date
Shopper Media Group
On 9 April 2021 Next 15 purchased the entire issued share capital of Shopper Media Group Ltd (“SMG”) and its subsidiaries, a UK based agency specialising in commerce 
marketing activation, connecting retailers and brands with shoppers at the point of purchase both online and in-store. The initial consideration is approximately £15.7m 
and further consideration is payable around June 2023 and June 2025 based on the EBITDA performance of SMG in the two year periods ending 31 January 2023 
and 31 January 2025. We expect to recognise goodwill on this acquisition due to the anticipated profitability and operating synergies. Due to the recent timing of the 
acquisition, the IFRS 3 acquisition accounting has not yet been completed. 

135

Financial statementsCompany balance sheet
as at 31 January 2021 and 31 January 2020

Non-current assets 
Intangible assets
Tangible assets 
Right-of-use assets
Investments in subsidiaries
Investment in financial assets
Deferred tax assets

Current assets 
Trade and other receivables 
Current tax asset

Current liabilities 
Borrowings
Trade and other payables 
Lease liabilities
Provisions
Contingent consideration
Deferred consideration

Net current assets

Total assets less current liabilities 

Non-current liabilities
Borrowings
Other financial liabilities
Lease liabilities
Provisions

Net assets 

136

Note

2
3
4
5

10

6

7
4
9

8
8
4

2021
£’000

313
1,310
5,663
183,925
834
892

36,421
2,259

5,000
23,270
1,973
4,636
1,596
1,262

7,810
8,349
5,478
6,076

2021
£’000

192,937

38,680

(37,737)

943

193,880

(27,713)

166,167

2020
£’000

646
1,050
6,115
170,916
838
755

49,412
2,259

5,000
19,667
1,213
1,129
7,402
2,715

33,007
7,080
5,576
3,578

2020
£’000

180,320

51,671

(37,126)

14,545

194,865

(49,241)

145,624

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Equity 
Share capital 
Share premium account 
Merger reserve 
Share-based payment reserve 
Other reserve
Retained earnings 

Note

11

2021
£’000

2,274
92,408
3,075
9,008
26,460
32,942

2021
£’000

2020
£’000

2,163
76,019
3,075
8,136
26,460
29,771

2020
£’000

Equity attributable to owners of the Company 

166,167

145,624

The following notes are an integral part of this Company Balance Sheet.

The Company reported a profit for the financial year ended 31 January 2021 of £3,175,000 (2020: £12,937,000).

These financial statements were approved and authorised for issue by the Board on 12 April 2021.

Peter Harris
Chief Financial Officer

Company number 01579589

137

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company statement of changes in equity
for the year ended 31 January 2021 and 31 January 2020

At 31 January 2019

Change in accounting policy (IFRS 16)

Deferred tax on accounting policy change (IFRS 16)

Share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
account
£’000

2,089

62,993

—

—

—

—

Merger
reserve
£’000

3,075

—

—

Share-
based
payment
reserve
£’000

7,925

—

—

At 1 February 2019 (as restated)

2,089

62,993

3,075

7,925

Profit for the period
Fair value loss on investments in equity instruments 
designated as FVTOCI
Dividends 
Shares issued in satisfaction of vested share options 
and performance shares
Shares issued on acquisition
Movement in hedging reserve
Movement in relation to share-based payments
Movement due to ESOP share purchases
Movement due to ESOP share option exercises

—

—
—

38
36
—
—
—
—

—

—
—

5,388
7,638
—
—
—
—

—

—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—

—

—
—

(15)
—
—
226
—
—

At 1 February 2020

2,163

76,019

3,075

8,136

Profit for the period
Fair value loss on investments in equity instruments 
designated as FVTOCI
Shares issued in satisfaction of vested share options 
and performance shares
Shares issued on acquisition
Movement in relation to share-based payments
Movement due to ESOP share purchases
Movement due to ESOP share option exercises

—

—

69
42
—
—
—

—

—

10,162
6,227
—
—
—

—

—

—
—
—
—
—

—

—

(5)
—
877
—
—

At 31 January 2021

2,274

92,408

3,075

9,008

The following notes are an integral part of this Company Statement of Changes in Equity.

ESOP
reserve
£’000

—

—

—

—

—

—
—

—
—
—
—
(15)
15

—

—

—

—
—
—
(5)
5

—

Other
reserve
£’000

26,871

—

—

26,871

—

—
—

—
—
(411)
—
—
—

Retained
earnings
£’000

Total
£’000

24,616

127,569

(573)

97

24,140

12,937

(547)
(6,759)

—
—
—
—
—
—

(573)

97

127,093

12,937

(547)
(6,759)

5,411
7,674
(411)
226
(15)
15

26,460

29,771

145,624

—

—

—
—
—
—
—

3,175

3,175

(4)

—
—
—
—
—

(4)

10,226
6,269
877
(5)
5

26,460

32,942

166,167

138

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes forming part of the Company financial statements
for the year ended 31 January 2021

1 Accounting policies 
A. Basis of preparation
Next Fifteen Communications Group plc is a company incorporated in the United Kingdom under the Companies Act. The address of the registered office is given on 
the inside back cover. The nature of the Company’s operations and its principal activities are set out in the Strategic Report on pages 1 to 23. The Company meets the 
definition of a qualifying entity under FRS 100 (Financial Reporting Standard 100) issued by the Financial Reporting Council. These financial statements were prepared 
in accordance with FRS 101 (Financial Reporting Standard 101) ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ as issued by the Financial Reporting Council incorporating the amendments 
to FRS 101 issued by the FRC in July 2015 and July 2016. 

The separate financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis except for the revaluation of certain financial instruments measured at fair value at 
the end of each reporting period, and are in accordance with applicable accounting standards in the United Kingdom. The principal accounting policies adopted are 
the same as those set out in note 1 to the consolidated financial statements except as noted below. 

As permitted by section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 the Company has elected not to present its own profit and loss account or statement of comprehensive income 
for the year. The profit attributable to the Company is disclosed in the footnote to the Company’s balance sheet.

The auditor’s remuneration for audit and other services is disclosed in note 4 to the consolidated financial statements.

The new standards and amendments which have not yet been adopted are disclosed in note 1, section U, to the consolidated financial statements. 

As permitted by FRS 101, the Company has taken advantage of the disclosure exemptions available under that standard in relation to business combinations, share-
based payments, financial instruments, capital management, presentation of comparative information in respect of certain assets, presentation of a cash flow statement, 
standards not yet effective, impairment of assets and related-party transactions. Where required, equivalent disclosures are given in the Group accounts of Next Fifteen 
Communications Group plc. The Group accounts of Next Fifteen Communications Group plc are available to the public and are at the beginning of this section.

The monthly average number of employees during the year was 45 and employee costs for the year totalled £4,813,000 (2020: £3,292,000). This was made up of 
£3,632,000 in respect of wages and salaries (2020: £2,474,000); £584,000 in respect of social security (2020: £604,000); £162,000 in respect of pension costs 
(2020: £107,000) as well as £435,000 in relation to share-based payment charges (2020: £107,000). Disclosures relating to the remuneration of the Parent company’s 
Directors are included in the Directors’ remuneration report on pages 40 to 57.

B. Investments in subsidiaries
An investment in a subsidiary is recognised at cost less any provision for impairment. 

139

Financial statementsNotes forming part of the Company financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 January 2021

1 Accounting policies continued
C. Going concern
The Company’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position, are set out in the Strategic Report section 
of the annual report, which also describes the financial position of the Company; its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities; the Company’s objectives, 
policies and processes for managing its capital; its financial risk management objectives; details of its financial instruments and hedging activities; and its exposure to 
credit risk and liquidity risk.

The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future. Thus, they 
continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the annual financial statements.

D. Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty
Critical judgements in applying the Group’s accounting policies
There are no critical judgements, apart from those involving estimations (which are dealt with separately below), that the Directors have made in the process of applying 
the Group’s accounting policies and that have the most significant effect on the amounts recognised in financial statements. 

Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The key assumptions concerning the future, and other key sources of estimation uncertainty at the reporting period that may have a significant risk of causing a material 
adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year, are discussed below.

I. Impairment of investments in subsidiaries
Determining whether the Company’s investments in subsidiaries have been impaired requires estimations of the investments’ values in use. The value-in-use calculations 
require the entity to estimate the future cash flows expected to arise from the investments and suitable discount rates in order to calculate present values. The carrying 
amount of investments in subsidiaries at the balance sheet date was £184m.

II. Contingent consideration, share purchase obligation and valuation of put options
Contingent consideration and share purchase obligations relating to acquisitions have been included based on discounted management estimates of the most likely 
outcome. The difference between the fair value of the liabilities and the actual amounts payable is charged to the Consolidated Income Statement as notional finance 
costs over the life of the associated liability. Changes in the estimates of contingent consideration payable and the share purchase obligation are recognised in finance 
income/expense. These require judgements around future revenue growth, profit margins and discount rates, which, if inappropriate, would result in a material adjustment 
to the value of these liabilities within the next financial year. Further details are contained in note 17 in the Group financial statements and note 7 in the Company 
financial statements.

140

Financial statements2 Intangible assets

Cost 
At 1 February 2020
Additions 

At 31 January 2021

Accumulated depreciation 
At 1 February 2020
Charge for the year 

At 31 January 2021

Net book value 
At 31 January 2021

At 31 January 2020

3 Tangible assets

Cost
At 1 February 2020
Additions 

At 31 January 2021

Accumulated depreciation 
At 1 February 2020
Charge for the year 

At 31 January 2021

Net book value 
At 31 January 2021

At 31 January 2020

Computer
software
£’000

3,654
67

3,721

3,008
400

3,408

313

646

Total
£’000

2,594
660

3,254

1,544
400

1,944

1,310

1,050

Short leasehold
improvements
£’000

Office
equipment
£’000

1,811
621

2,432

937
350

1,287

1,145

874

783
39

822

607
50

657

165

176

141

Financial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes forming part of the Company financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 January 2021

4 Leases
The movements in the year ended 31 January 2021 were as follows: 

Right-of-use assets:

At 31 January 2020
Additions
Depreciation of right-of-use assets

At 31 January 2021

At 31 January 2021 the closing cost was £10,983,000 (2020: £10,214,000) and the closing accumulated depreciation was £5,320,000 (2020: £4,099,000).  

Lease liabilities:

At 31 January 2020
Additions
Interest expense related to lease liabilities
Repayment of lease liabilities

At 31 January 2021

The maturity of the lease liabilities is as follows:

Amounts payable:
Within one year
In two to five years
After five years

Total gross future liability

Effect of discounting

Lease liability at 31 January

142

Land and
buildings
£’000

6,115
769
(1,221)

5,663

Land and
buildings
£’000

6,789
2,242
206
(1,786)

7,451

2021
£’000

2,163
4,841
939

7,943

(492)

7,451

Financial statements 
5 Investments

Cost 
At 1 February 2020
Acquisitions¹

At 31 January 2021

Total
£’000

170,916
13,009

183,925

1  

 On 15 July 2020, the Company purchased 100% of the issued share capital of Conversion Rates Experts Limited. On 1 February 2020, the Company purchased 100% of the share capital of The Craft Consulting Limited. 
Refer to note 26 in the Group financial statements for further details of the acquisitions made in the year.

The Directors consider the value of investments in subsidiary undertakings to be not less than that stated in the balance sheet of the Company. 

The Company’s subsidiaries are those as listed in note 27 of the consolidated financial statements.

6 Trade and other receivables

Amounts falling due within one year
Amounts due from subsidiary undertakings 
Other debtors 
Prepayments and accrued income 
Other taxation

Total trade and other receivables 

7 Trade and other payables 

Overdraft
Trade creditors 
Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings 
Other taxation and social security 
Other creditors 
Accruals and deferred income 

Total trade and other payables

Company
2021
£’000

Company
2020
£’000

33,758
1,643
745
275

36,421

Company
2021
£’000

12,644
1,074
8,514
175
—
863

23,270

48,015
922
320
155

49,412

Company
2020
£’000

4,333
327
13,750
117
7
1,133

19,667

143

Financial statementsNotes forming part of the Company financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 January 2021

8 Non-current liabilities 

Bank loan¹

Between one and two years
Between two and five years
After five years

Contingent consideration

Between one and two years
Between two and five years
After five years

Deferred consideration

Between one and two years
Between two and five years
After five years

Share purchase obligation

Between one and two years
Between two and five years
After five years

Total

Company
2021
£’000

12,810

5,000
7,810
—

4,643

1,596
3,047
—

1,262

1,262
—
—

5,302

—
5,302
—

Company
2020
£’000

33,007

5,000
28,007
—

4,982

1,350
3,632
—

—

—
—
—

2,098

—
2,098
—

24,017

40,087

1  The entire bank facility is secured on guarantees from the guarantor pool.

The bank loans are valued at the net proceeds drawn down at the exchange rates prevailing at the time they are drawn. The foreign currency element of the loans is 
revalued at the prevailing rate at 31 January 2021.

The Company has no fair value Level 1 instruments (2020: none). The Company’s investments in financial assets are Level 2 instruments and are measured at historic 
quoted prices. All other instruments at fair value through profit or loss are Level 3 instruments being the contingent consideration and share purchase obligation liabilities. 

Level 3 financial instruments are valued using the discounted cash flow method to capture the present value of the expected future economic benefits that will flow 
out of the Group arising from the contingent consideration or share purchase obligation. They are not based on observable market data.

144

Financial statements9 Provisions 

At 31 January 2020
Additions
Utilised in period

At 31 January 2021

Employment-
related
acquisition
liabilities
£’000

4,707
7,134
(1,129)

10,712

Total
£’000

4,707
7,134
(1,129)

10,712

Employment-related acquisition liabilities are provisions for the portion of consideration which is payable subject to continuing employment of the previous owners within the Group. The expected liability is recognised over 
the required employment term of the seller and is separately recognised as an employment-related acquisition payment provision.

10 Deferred tax
Deferred tax is provided as follows:

At 31 January 2019
Accounting policy change (IFRS 16)
Credit to income

At 31 January 2020

Credit to income

At 31 January 2021

11 Share capital and reserves

Authorised, allotted, called up and fully paid
90,982,974 Ordinary Shares of 2.5p each

Accelerated
capital
allowances
£’000

Tax losses
£’000

5
—
30

35

85

120

17
—
(17)

—

—

—

Other
£’000

25
97
598

720

52

772

2021
£’000

2,274

Total
£’000

47
97
611

755

137

892

2020
£’000

2,163

For details on changes to issued share capital in the year, please refer to note 20 in the Group financial statements. For details of the dividends declared and paid in 
the year, please refer to note 9 in the Group financial statements. 

145

Financial statementsNotes forming part of the Company financial statements continued
for the year ended 31 January 2021

12 Operating leases
As a result of the transition to IFRS 16, leases previously classified as operating leases have now been recognised on balance sheet, except for the short-term leases 
and leases of low value assets which are included below.

As at 31 January 2021, the Company’s total future minimum lease rentals are as follows: 

In respect of operating leases which will be paid in the following periods:
Within one year

Operating leases relate to the rental of office space for the Group in the UK.

2021

Land and
buildings
£’000

—

—

Other
£’000

—

—

2020

Land and
buildings
£’000

91

91

Other
£’000

27

27

13 Related-party transactions
During the period the Company received the following amounts in respect of Head Office costs and intercompany interest from undertakings which were not wholly 
owned at the balance sheet date: 

Intercompany interest

Recharges

Agent3 Limited

Blueshirt Group LLC

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

—

—

—

—

At 31 January the Company had the following intercompany amounts receivable from/(payable to) the subsidiaries below:

Agent3 Limited
Blueshirt Group LLC

146

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

1,316

257

Year ended
31 January
2021
£’000

859
121

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

906

243

Year ended
31 January
2020
£’000

2,986
4

Financial statementsFive-year financial information
for the 12-month period ended 31 January 2021 (unaudited)

Profit and loss 
Net revenue 
Staff costs
Operating profit
Net finance expense
(Loss)/profit before income tax
Income tax expense
(Loss)/profit for the year 
Non-controlling interests 
(Loss)/profit attributable to owners of the Parent 

Balance sheet 
Non-current assets
Net current (liabilities)/assets 
Non-current liabilities
Total equity attributable to owners of the Parent 
Non-controlling interests
Total equity 

Cash flow 
(Loss)/profit for the year
Non-cash adjustments and working capital movements
Net cash generated from operations
Income tax paid
Net cash from operating activities
Acquisition of subsidiaries net of cash acquired
Acquisition of property, plant and equipment
Net cash outflow from investing activities
Net cash movement in bank borrowings
Dividends paid to owners of the Parent
Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing activities
(Decrease)/increase in cash for the year 
Dividend per share (p) 

Year ended
2021
IFRS
£’000

Year ended
2020
IFRS
£’000

Year ended
2019
IFRS
£’000

Year ended
2018
IFRS
£’000

Year ended
2017
IFRS
£’000

266,886
189,530
13,688
(15,425)
(1,306)
(2,643)
(3,949)
989
(4,938)

216,072
(6,128)
(93,063)
116,957
(76)
116,881

(3,949)
76,882
72,933
(8,423)
64,510
(8,097)
(1,998)
(26,994)
(24,912)
—
(39,126)
(1,610)
7.0

248,469
171,180
19,413
(14,061)
5,556
(2,717)
2,839
577
2,262

224,370
1,780
(113,439)
113,296
(585)
112,711

2,839
46,662
49,501
(5,993)
43,508
(18,501)
(3,460)
(28,340)
13,039
(6,759)
(6,826)
8,342
2.5

224,093
153,247
20,677
(1,917)
18,825
(4,299)
14,526
639
13,887

155,028
10,792
(54,367)
112,529
(1,076)
111,453

14,526
23,856
38,382
(6,237)
32,145
(19,281)
(5,648)
(37,154)
(10,922)
(5,243)
645
(4,364)
7.56

196,811
136,346
17,225
(3,955)
13,296
(4,000)
9,296
664
8,632

120,082
15,014
(58,775)
76,964
(643)
76,321

9,296
19,569
28,865
(4,284)
24,581
(9,824)
(2,974)
(19,399)
4,484
(4,121)
(2,034)
3,148
6.30

171,013
126,756
7,914
(4,742)
2,900
(1,232)
1,668
530
1,138

107,410
15,243
(54,156)
67,571
926
68,497

1,668
31,176
32,844
(1,978)
30,866
(14,546)
(8,284)
(30,592)
11,589
(3,264)
6,500
6,774
5.25

147

Financial statementsFive-year financial information continued
for the 12-month period ended 31 January 2021 (unaudited)

Basic earnings per share (p)
Diluted earnings per share (p)

Key performance indicators and other non-statutory measures
Adjusted staff costs as a % of net revenue1
Adjusted EBITDA2
Adjusted profit before income tax3
Diluted adjusted earnings per share (p)4
Net cash/(debt)5

Year ended
2021
IFRS
£’000

(5.5)
(5.3)

66.8
63,895
49,117
40.7
14,021

Year ended
2020
IFRS
£’000

2.7
2.5

65.6
56,764
40,237
34.8
(9,346)

Year ended
2019
IFRS
£’000

17.5
16.3

65.9
41,733
36,004
33.1
(5,177)

Year ended
2018
IFRS
£’000

11.6
10.5

67.0
34,388
29,338
27.8
(11,593)

Year ended
2017
IFRS
£’000

1.6
1.5

67.6
28,964
24,200
23.4
(11,412)

1  Staff costs excluding restructuring costs. See note 5 of the financial statements.

2 

 Operating profit before depreciation, amortisation, acquisition-related consideration movements and other adjusting items.

3  See note 5 of the financial statements.

4  See note 10 of the financial statements.

5 

 Net debt excludes contingent consideration and share purchase obligations. See note 19 of the financial statements.

148

Financial statementsShareholder information

Financial calendar
Preliminary results

2021 full-year results announcement

13 April 2021

Annual General Meeting

24 June 2021

2022 half-year results announcement

October 2021

Year end

31 January 2022

2022 full-year results announcement

April 2022

out-of-date dividend cheques, change of dividend payment 
methods and to apply for the Dividend Reinvestment Plan. 
Shareholders who have not yet elected to receive shareholder 
documentation in electronic form can sign up by registering 
at www.signalshares.com. Should shareholders who have 
elected for electronic communications require a paper copy 
of any of the Company’s shareholder documentation, or 
wish to change their instructions, they should contact Link Group.

Final dividend

Ex-dividend date

Record date

Last date for DRIP election

8 July 2021

9 July 2021

23 July 2021

Payment of 2021 final dividend 

13 August 2021

Interim dividend

Ex-dividend date
Record date
Last date for DRIP election
Payment of 2022 interim dividend

October 2021
October 2021
November 2021
November 2021

These dates are provisional and may be subject to change.

Annual General Meeting
Please see page 59 for further details.

Managing your shares and shareholder communications
The Company’s shareholder register is maintained by its 
registrar, Link Group. Information on how to manage your 
shareholdings can be found at www.signalshares.com. 
Shareholders can contact Link Group in relation to all 
administrative enquiries relating to their shares, such as a 
change of personal details, the loss of a share certificate, 

Registrar
Link Group 
10th Floor, Central Square  
29 Wellington Street  
Leeds  
LS1 4DL

Telephone from the UK: 0371 664 0300 

Calls are charged at the standard geographic rate and will 
vary by provider. Lines are open Monday to Friday (9.00 a.m.–
5.30 p.m.).

Telephone from overseas: +44 (0)371 664 0300

Calls outside the UK will be charged at the applicable 
international rate. 

E-mail: enquiries@linkgroup.co.uk

Dividends
Dividends can be paid directly into your bank account. This 
is the easiest way for shareholders to receive dividend 
payments and avoids the risk of lost or out-of-date cheques. 
A dividend mandate form is available from Link Group or at 
www.signalshares.com.

For dividends payable on or after 6 April 2018 the dividend 
nil rate will only apply to the first £2,000 of a person’s dividend 
income. Please refer to HMRC’s website www.gov.uk/tax-
on-dividends or seek advice from a professional tax adviser 
if you have any doubt about how this impacts your tax position.

Link Group is also able to pay dividends to shareholder 
bank accounts in many currencies worldwide through the 
International Payment Service. An administrative fee will be 
deducted from each dividend payment. Further details 
can be obtained from Link Asset Services or at http://ips.
linkassetservices.com/.

Dividend Reinvestment Plan
The Company operates a Dividend Reinvestment Plan (‘DRIP’) 
which enables shareholders to buy the Company’s shares 
on the London Stock Exchange with their cash dividend. 
Further information about the DRIP is available from Link 
Group. If shareholders would like their future dividends to 
qualify for the DRIP, completed application forms must be 
returned to the registrar.

Shareholder fraud
Fraud is on the increase and many shareholders are targeted 
every year. If you have any reason to believe that you may 
have been the target of fraud, or attempted fraud, in relation 
to your shareholding, please contact Link Group immediately.

More detailed information can be found on the FCA website 
at: www.fsa.gov.uk/consumerinformation/scamsandswindles/
investment_scams/boiler_room.

149

Other informationInvestor relations 
Investor-relations@next15.com 

Registered office 
Next Fifteen Communications Group plc 
75 Bermondsey Street  
London SE1 3XF 

T: +44 (0)20 7908 6444 

Company number 
01579589 

Website 
www.next15.com

Advisers

Nominated adviser and joint broker 
Numis Securities 
10 Paternoster Square  
London EC4M 7LT 

Joint broker 
Berenberg
Joh. Berenberg, Gossler & Co. KG  
London Branch  
60 Threadneedle Street  
London EC2R 8HP

External Auditor 
Deloitte LLP 
Hill House  
1 Little New Street  
London EC4A 3TR 

Bankers 
HSBC Bank plc 
8 Canada Square  
London E14 5HQ 

150

Other informationNext Fifteen Communications Group plc’s commitment to 
environmental issues is reflected in this Annual Report, which 
has been printed on Amadeus silk, an FSC® certified material.

This  document  was  printed  by  Pureprint  Group  using  its 
environmental print technology, with 99% of dry waste diverted 
from landfill, minimising the impact of printing on the environment. 
The printer is a CarbonNeutral® company.

Both the printer and the paper mill are registered to ISO 14001.

CBP006636

N

e

x

t

F

i

f

t

e

e

n

C

o

m

m

u

n

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

s

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

2

1

Next Fifteen Communications Group plc
75 Bermondsey Street  
London SE1 3XF  
T: +44 (0)20 7908 6444  
www.next15.com